Sie sind auf Seite 1von 140

NTSC / PAL

Studio/OB/EFP Camera Family

BVP-900/950 900P/950P Series


Product Information Manual

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1-1. Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3

3 1-3. Sony Design Criteria for Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) Cameras 3 1-4. Features of the BVP-900/900P ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3 1-5. Features of the BVP-950/950P ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4 1-6. Optical Head Block ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 1-7. Familiar Digital Command System ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 1-8. Automated Set-up ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) using 12-bit A/D Conversion
................................................................................................... .......................................................................................

A TOTAL SYSTEM .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6


6 10 2-3. Camera Control Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 2-4. Control System ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11 2-5. Viewfinders ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11 2-6. BVP-900/900P Optional System Accessories .................................................................................................................................................................. 12 2-7. A New Series of Viewfinders for the BVP-950/950P ................................................................................................................................................... 12 2-8. Rack Mounting of System Equipment .................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 2-9. Basic Connection Examples ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
2-1. System Configuration 2-2. Camera Head
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES ............................................................................................................... 17


3-1. Industry-first Plug-in Imager Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................................... 17 3-2. Sony CCD Advantages ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17 3-3. Power HAD 1000 CCD ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 3-4. High Depth of Modulation ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 3-5. Minimum Aliasing with New Optical Low-Pass Filter ................................................................................................................................................. 18 3-6. High Sensitivity ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18

19 3-8. Excellent Signal-to-Noise Ratio 19 3-9. Super EVS (Enhanced Vertical Definition System) ....................................................................................................................................................... 19 3-10. Clear Scan and ECS (Extended Clear Scan) .................................................................................................................................................................... 19
3-7. Invisible Smear Level
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................

SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP) .................................................................................................................. 20


4-1. Basic block diagram ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 20

20 21 ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-4. Digital Signal Processing Domain 21


4-2. Image Capture
......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................................................................................

4-3. Analog Signal Processing Domain

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22


5-1. Full DSP Camera Processing ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 22 5-2. Precise Handling of Highlight Position .................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 5-3. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance .................................................................................................................................................................. 29 5-4. Low power consumption ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 29

CONTENTS

CONTROL SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 30


6-1. Sony Camera Command Network System .......................................................................................................................................................................... 30 6-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30 6-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-700 and CNU-500 ................................................................................................................................ 31

38 40 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 6-6. Auto Set-up 40 6-7. Control Priority and Parallel Mode ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 40 6-8. S-Bus Control ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
6-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700 Series 6-5. File
..........................................................................................................................................................................

System .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 8 9 10

WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 44


7-1. Advantages of Sony Wideband Triax Transmission 7-2. Triax Cable Information
..................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................

44 46

SET-UP MENUS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47 Function Comparison Chart ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 54 Location and Function of Parts and Controls ........................................................................................................................................................... 57
(a) BVP-900/900P ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 57

63 66 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (d) CCU-700A/700AP 71 (e) CCU-550/550P ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 74 (f) CNU-700 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 79 (g) CNU-500 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 80 (h) VCS-700 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 81 (i) MSU-700 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 83 (j) RCP-740/741 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 90 (k) RCP-730/731 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 97 (l) RCP-720/721 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 104 (m) RCP-700/701 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 110 (n) RM-B150 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 112 (o) BVF-7700/7700P .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 119 (p) BVF-77/77CE ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 121 (q) BVF-55/55CE ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
(b) BVP-950/950P (c) CA-570/570P
........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

11

Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 125


NTSC ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 PAL .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131 NTSC/PAL Common Accessories ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 137

INTRODUCTION
and which are largely immune to physical factors such as temperature changes and time.

1-1. Overview
The BVP-900 full-size studio model color video camera and its companion portable version, the BVP-950, are the flagship models of the Sony CCD camera system. Developed for both studio and outside broadcasting applications, this camera system is based on several independent units, each of which has its own unique function. They include pickup devices, camera heads, camera control units, a video selector, master set-up units and remote control panels. With the appropriate choice of units a wide variety of systems can be implemented - from a single stand-alone camera to installations using a total of 96 studio and portable models. (Note: the BVP-900 and BVP-950 are for operation on 525 lines, 60 fields using the NTSC color standard. The BVP-900P and BVP-950P versions are for operation on 625 lines, 50 fields using the PAL color standard.)

1-4. Features of the BVP-900/900P


Easy-to-change CCD unit: The CCD unit is a separate block from the camera head, so changing the aspect ratio from 16:9 and 4:3 and vice versa is simply a matter of exchanging units. No readjustments are required after the change under normal operating conditions. The 1038H (NTSC/PAL) FIT Power HAD 1000 CCD Imager is incorporated in the BVP-900/900P. (refer to Section 3) Easy-to-operate design: The body design inherits the features of previous generations of Sony cameras. A lower viewfinder position decreases parallax between the lens and viewfinder. Also, the angle of view from the camera operators position is wider, as the total height of the camera is lower. High picture quality: A newly developed 12-bit/36 MHz videoprocessing VLSI for broadcasting cameras assures the high quality of pictures required for a studio-use CCD camera. (refer to Section 4) High signal-to-noise ratio: A high signal-to-noise ratio of 65 dB (NTSC)/63 dB (PAL) has been achieved as a result of the use of a top-performing Power HAD CCD, a new video-processing VLSI and 12-bit A/D converter. Wide dynamic range: Automatic and manual control of knee point and knee slope enables the clear reproduction of high-luminance subjects at up to 600 % of nominal exposure level. High sensitivity: A sensitivity of F10.0 at 2000 lux with OHB750WSA/P, OHB-730WS/P and OHB-730/P (typical) is achieved. For OHB-750A/P, F8.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is achieved. When the video gain is raised by +18 dB, a video level of 100% is obtained with minimum subject illumination of 5 lux. (OHB-750A/P: 7.5 lux) High vertical resolution: The vertical resolution can be improved to 450 lines for the BVP-900 (550 lines for the BVP-900P) by use of the EVS (Enhanced Vertical Definition System) function. The Super EVS function, available when a FIT CCD block is installed, enables the vertical resolution to be adjusted to a desired value between 400 and 450 lines for the BVP-900 (with an OHB-750A/750WSA CCD Unit installed) or between 480 and 530 lines for the BVP-900P (with an OHB-750AP/750WSAP CCD Unit installed). High horizontal luminance resolution: 900 TV lines is achieved with an OHB-750A/P or OHB-730/P CCD Unit installed. Imperceptible vertical smear level: -145 dB by using the well proven Power HAD 1000 CCD (FIT), with additional technology enhancements. Ver y high depth of modulation: 80% at 5 MHz is achieved. Automatic set-up and filing function: Built-in microcomputers give quick and precise automatic set-up, and also reduce the time required for maintenance. The adjusted data can be stored in the camera filing system. Electronic shutter: An electronic six-speed shutter (from 1/60 or 1/100 second to 1/2000 second) is provided with the BVP-900/900P. A rapidly moving object can be clearly shot by selecting the optimum shutter speed. The shutter also has an ECS (Extended Clear Scan) function. Using this function, the shutter speed of the BVP-900 can be adjusted in 510 steps (from 1/30 to 1/58.3 and from 1/60 to 1/7000 second), and that of the BVP-900P in 607 steps (from 1/25 to 1/48.7 and from 1/50 to 1/9000 second). Appropriate shutter-speed

1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) using 12bit A/D Conversion
Easy set-up and high reliability: With digital processing, parameters are held in a digital memory and stay constant for long periods of time. As a result the need for operator adjustment is dramatically reduced. A further advantage of using digital processing is that it is much easier to implement this circuitry in ICs and LSIs, achieving benefits in reliability. Precise adjustment: The value of camera set-up parameters can be defined with great precision by digital processing. Moreover, variations between cameras, which are very difficult to avoid in analog models, can be reduced to a minimum with digital processing by simply equalizing parameter values. Flexible signal processing and parameter setting: A significant advantage of digital processing is that it can provide very flexible operation. Many camera parameters can be controlled and each parameter setting can be varied over a wide range of values.

1-3. Sony Design Criteria for Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP) Cameras
DSP cameras have tremendous potential to provide outstanding improvements in camera operational efficiency. So when considering the basic design concepts of its new DSP cameras, Sony laid down the following design criteria. * The BVP-900 Series must provide higher picture quality than conventional 10-bit digital cameras. Operationally, it must be compatible with previous Sony cameras. * Digital system architecture should be consistent with current 10bit digital cameras so that both types can be mixed together without picture matching difficulties. * Camera peripherals should have a consistent design approach. * To take full advantage of 12-bit digitization, as many camera processes as possible should be digital; particularly gamma, detail and so on. Sony has taken these design criteria very seriously, introducing 12bit ADSP cameras with unprecedented performance and reliability,
3

INTRODUCTION

selection with use of the ECS function minimizes horizontal streaking when shooting computer display screens. Dynamic shading compensation function: When the zoom angle is changed with the iris aperture almost completely open, modulation shading can appear. The BVP-900/900P can automatically compensate for this phenomenon to obtain optimum picture quality at any zoom position. (This function is activated only when a lens allowing this function is attached.) Full range of audio features: The BVP-900/900P has two microphone channels and one program audio channel. A switch on the camera side panel changes the microphone inputs to accept line level (-20 dBu) signals. Production and Engineering intercom, and a program audio channel, are provided. Self-diagnostic functions: The BVP-900/900P has self-diagnostics functions to facilitate troubleshooting. Display capability: Characters from a built-in character generator are used by the BVP-900/900P to display zoom position, focus position, the camera set up status and warning messages on the viewfinder screen. A box cursor, center marker, safety zone and zoom position are also displayed on the viewfinder screen. (refer to Section 2) Optional high-resolution 7-inch viewfinders: An optional 7-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-77/77CE) or 7-inch color viewfinder (BVF-7700/7700P) can be used with the BVP-900/900P. For easy-tosee operation, the viewfinder angle can easily be changed and fixed in the desired position. Attaching and detaching the viewfinder does not require any tools. (refer to Section 2) Picture-in-picture capability: The camera picture and the return video picture can be checked simultaneously. With BVF-7700/7700P, both the camera picture and the return video picture can be displayed in color. High-picture-quality return video: Monitoring a high-quality return video picture on a or color viewfinder is possible because of a 3-line adaptive comb filter. (Monitoring on B/W viewfinder is also enabled.) Reliable transmission using triax cable: The BVP-900/900P supplies wideband component video signals (Y, R-Y and B-Y) to a CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit via a triax cable with high transmission reliability. The triax cable simultaneously transmits power, video, audio and control signals between the BVP-900/900P and the CCU-700A/700AP. Higher resolution and picture quality are achieved with this wide bandwidth. (refer to Section 7) Compact, lightweight and power-saving design: The BVP900/900P is a compact, lightweight design with low-power consumption. These are fundamental requirements for outside broadcast operation. Precise, flexible and easy picture adjustment: In addition to conventional camera adjustments, the BVP-900/900P features many new control items. (refer to Section 5)

1-5. Features of the BVP-950/950P


Easy-to-change CCD unit: The CCD unit is a separate block from the camera head so that the aspect ratio can be easily changed between 16:3 and 4:3 simply by replacing the unit. No readjustment is required after the change under normal operating conditions. Newly developed LSI: A newly developed digital signal processing

LSI and a 12-bit A/D converter provide comprehensive control functions and assure a high-quality picture. High signal-to-noise ratio: A high signal-to-noise ratio has been achieved by use of a top-performing Power HAD 1000 CCD, outstanding circuit design and electronic packaging technology. Wide dynamic range: Automatic and manual controls of knee point and knee slope enable high-luminance subjects to be reproduced in up to 600% of normal light. High sensitivity: : A sensitivity of F10.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is achieved with OHB-750WSA/P, OHB-730WS/P and OHB-730/P. For OHB-750A/P, F8.0 at 2000 lux (typical) is achieved. When the video gain is raised by +18 dB, a video level of 100% is obtained with minimum subject illumination of 5 lux. High vertical resolution: The vertical resolution can be improved to 450 lines for the BVP-950 or to 550 lines for the BVP-950P by use of the EVS (Enhanced Vertical Definition System) function. The Super EVS function, available when a FIT CCD block is installed, enables the vertical resolution to be adjusted to a desired value between 350 and 450 lines for the BVP-950 (with an OHB750A/750WSA CCD Unit installed) or between 450 and 550 lines for the BVP-950P (with an OHB-750AP/750WSAP CCD Unit installed). Automatic setup and filing function: Built-in microcomputers allow quick and precise automatic setup, and also reduce the time required for maintenance. The adjusted data can be stored in the camera using a filing function. Electronic shutter: An electronic six-speed shutter (from 1/60 or 1/100 second to 1/2000 second) is provided with the BVP-950/950P. A rapidly moving object can be clearly shot by selecting the optimum shutter speed. The shutter also has an ECS (Extended Clear Scan) function. Using this function, the shutter speed of the BVP-950 can be adjusted in 510 steps (from 1/30 to 1/58.3 and from 1/60 to 1/7000 second), and that of the BVP-950P in 607 steps (from 1/25 to 1/48.7 and from 1/50 to 1/9000 second). Appropriate shutter-speed selection with use of the ECS function minimizes horizontal streaking when shooting computer display screens. Self-diagnostic functions: The BVP-950/950P has self-diagnostic functions to facilitate troubleshooting. Display capability: Characters from a built-in character generator are used by the BVP-950/950P to display zoom position, focus position, the camera set up status and warning messages on the viewfinder screen. A center marker and safety zone are also displayed on the viewfinder screen. (refer to Section 2) Optional 1.5-inch, 2-inch or 5-inch viewfinders: A 1.5-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-10/10CE), 1.5-inch color viewfinder (BVF-C10W) or 2-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF20W/20WCE) can be attached to the BVP-950/950P. When a CA530/550/550P/570/570P Camera Adaptor is attached to the camera, a high-resolution 5-inch black-and-white viewfinder (BVF-55/55CE) can also be used. Compact, lightweight and power-saving design: The BVP950/950P is a compact, lightweight and portable design with lowpower consumption. These are fundamental requirements for outside broadcast operation. Precise, flexible and easy picture adjustment: In addition to conventional camera adjustments, the BVP-950/950P features many new control items. (refer to Section 5) Optional camera adaptor: The new CA-570/570P Camera Adaptor
4

INTRODUCTION

provides two independent intercom channels, which is ideal for use in studio and OB systems. The CA-530/530P Camera Adaptor provides an SDI output for portable digital VTRs. The CA-553 50-pin Interface Adaptor provides comprehensive system interfacing, a DNV-5 Betacam SX VTR or BVV-5/5PS Betacam SR VTR can be attached for stand-alone operation. * The previous generation of CCU-370/350 Series Camera Control Units cannot be used with the BVP-950/950P.

1-6. Optical Head Block


* A range of four, plug-in Power HAD 1000 CCD imaging capsules is available for optimum cost/performance choice. * Switchable aspect ratio videos with an OHB-750WSA/P or OHB730WS/P CCD unit installed. * Future developments in CCD technology easy to incorporate. * An additional order of magnitude protection against RFI (external Radio Frequency Interference).

1-7. Familiar Digital Command System


* The BVP-900 Series builds on the well established Sony principle of common operation. Video engineers accustomed to using the previous generation of Sony camera command equipment will find the BVP-900 Series familiar and easy to use. * High-speed management of digital command data between camera systems ensures virtually instant response. * Flexible reassignment of different camera systems to specific remote video control panels. * Central technical supervision of a multiple camera system and optimum picture matching are readily achieved. * PC Card - the complete set-up data of the camera and system configuration information can be accurately stored and retrieved. * The Sony ISR (Interactive Status Reporting) system enables comprehensive and efficient system management to be achieved from a PC terminal.

1-8. Automated Set-up


* Microprocessor controlled automatic set up capabilities in the digital domain include: - shading compensation at black and white video levels. - automatic hue detection for the skin tone detail function. - gamma, flare, knee, etc automatically aligned according to the customers adjustment reference data. * Menu setting can be done in the field by using the menu switch on the camera head or with an RM-B150 Hand-held Control Unit.

A TOTAL SYSTEM
being used as a standalone acquisition camera in combination with Betacam VTRs. Figure 2-2 shows how this interface is provided by the CA-553 50-pin Camera Adaptor. A variety of key peripherals, such as the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units help users to easily expand/upgrade their system. These peripherals provide a perfect interface with the growing ranges of Sony digital component equipment, such as Betacam SX and Digital BETACAM products.

2-1. System Configuration


The BVP-900 Series is based on the renowned BVP-700 Series and DSP technology pioneered by Sony in the earlier BVP-500 Series camera system. This new system features two camera heads, the BVP-900/900P full-size studio model and a full companion portable camera, the BVP-950/950P. This portable model is designed for full integration into a BVP-900/900P studio camera system, as well as

1 2

ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER BVF-77/77CE BVF-7700/7700P REMOTE CONTROL PANEL RCP-700 RCP-701

REMOTE CONTROL PANEL RCP-720 RCP-721 RCP-730 RCP-731 RCP-740 RCP-741 CCA-5 CABLE (*2) CCA-5 CABLE (*2)

STUDIO ZOOM LENS

CCD UNIT OHB-750A/750AP OHB-730/730P 4:3 TRIAX CABLE (*1) 16 : 9 OHB-750WSA/750WSAP OHB-730WS/730WSP COLOR VIDEO CAMERA BVP-900/900P CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-700/700P/700A/700AP

CCA-5 CABLE (*2) CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT CNU-700/500

CCA-5 CABLE (*2)

PIX 2 WF 2 VIDEO SELECTOR VCS-700 CCA-5 CABLE (max. 200m) CCA-5 CABLE (max. 200m)

2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE) 1.35-inch COLOR VF(BVF-C10W) 1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)

PIX 2(*4) ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER BVF-55/55CE WF 2(*4) PIX WF CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-570/570P CA-550/1 550P/1 TRIAX CABLE (*1)

MASTER SETUP UNIT MSU-700

CCD UNIT OHB-750A/750AP OHB-730/730P 4:3 ENG/EFP LENS 16 : 9 OHB-750WSA/750WSAP OHB-730WS/730WSP

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CCU-550/550P(*3) CCU-700/700P/700A/700AP

COLOR VIDEO CAMERA BVP-950/950P

CCA-5 CABLE (*2)

*2: CCA-5 CABLE LENGTH


CCU-700 CNU-700 200 m RCP-700/701/720 /721/730/731/740/741

OTHER OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES


For BVP-900/900P STANDALONE UNIT BKP-7910/7910P SCRIPT HOLDER BKP-7911/7912 TRIAX UNIT BKP-7010 RTS KIT BKP-7913 For CA-550/550P For BVP-950/950P ELECTRET CONDENSER MICROPHONE ECM-MS5 MICROPHONE C-74 CRADLE SUSPENSION CRS-3P
CCU-700 CNU-700 CCU-700 CNU-700 RCP-720/721/730 /731/740/741 16 0 m RCP-700/701

TELEPROMPTER UNIT BKP-5971

RCP-720/721/730 /731/740/741 90 m

RCP-720/721/730 /731/740/741

*1: TRIAX CABLE LENGTH Diamater Maximum length CCU-700 8.5 mm 14.5 mm 1000 m 2000 m CCU-550 700 m 1400 m 8.5 mm 14.5 mm CCU 500 m 1000 m CAM CAM 400 m 800 m CCU Diamater Cable-length limitation for prompter signal transmission

CCU-700

CNU-700

RCP-720/721/730 /731/740/741 45 m

RCP-720/721/730 /731/740/741

RCP-700/701

*3: When the CA-570/570P is connected with the CCU-550/550P, use of intercom transmission channel is limited to only one channel. In this case, use the INCOM 1 connector of the CA-570/570P. *4: When the CCU is connected with the VCS-700, the PIX 2 and WF 2 connectors of the CCU are normally used. When the CCU-550/550P is connected, use of PIX and WF transmission channels are limited to only one channel respectively. In this case, use the PIX and WF connectors for the CCU-550/550P.

Figure 2-1 System Configuration

A TOTAL SYSTEM

2-inch VF(BVF-20W/20WCE) 1.35-inch COLOR VF(BVF-C10W) 1.5-inch VF(BVF-10/10CE)

ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER BVF-55/55CE

CCD UNIT OHB-750A/750AP OHB-730/730P 4:3 ENG/EFP LENS 16 : 9 OHB-750WSA/750WSAP OHB-730WS/730WSP

CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-570/570P CA-550/1 550P/1 CA-530 CCZ CABLE COLOR VIDEO CAMERA BVP-950/950P

DIGITAL VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER DVW-250/250P

AC ADAPTOR AC-550/550CE REMOTE CABLE (max. 100 m)

MASTER REMOTE CONTROL SETUP UNIT PANEL RCP-700 RCP-701 RCP-720 RCP-721 RCP-730 RCP-731 RCP-740 RCP-741 MSU-700

CCA-5 CABLE (max. 50m)

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT( ) RM-B150

RETURN VIDEO SELECTOR CAC-6

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER BVV-5/5PS BETACAM ADAPTOR CA-553

CCZ CABLE

CAMERA ADAPTOR CA-3A

VTR

RECORDER UNIT DNV-5

: When the CA-550/550P is connected to the RM-B150, video signals cannot be output from the MONITOR connector of the RM-B150.

Figure 2-2 System ConfigurationPortable Cameras

A TOTAL SYSTEM

7-inch viewfinder Front cover (supplied) BVF-7700/7700P (with standard hood) OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS/ 750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP CCD Unit BVF-77/77CE (with standard hood) Zoom lens 1 BVP-900/900P Color Video Camera VFH-770 7-inch Viewfinder Sports Hood

BKP-7010 Long Triax Kit

Triax cable

BKP-7910/7910P Stand-Alone Kit (for using the BVP-900/900P as a stand-alone unit)

BKP-7911/7912 Script Holder (a script light included)

CCA-5 cable V-wedge shoe (supplied with the tripod)

RCP-700-Series Remote Control Panel or RM-B150 Remote Control Unit Tripod

Figure 2-3 Optional Accessories for BVP-900/900P

A TOTAL SYSTEM

Microphone

Water-resist cover

Carrying case

CAC-12 Microphone Holder

Front cover (supplied)

OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS/ 750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP CCD Unit

BVF-C10W 1.35-inch Viewfinder, BVF-10/10CE 1.5-inch Viewfinder, or BVF-20W/20WCE 2-inch Viewfinder

Zoom lens

BVP-950/950P Color Video Camera CA-530 CA-550/1 550P/1 CA-570/570P Camera Adaptor

VCT-14 Tripod Adaptor

CCA-5 cable (or the cable supplied with the RM-B150)

Caution
It is recommended to use the BVP-950/ 950P in combination with the CA-570/ 570P Camera Adapter. If the BVP-950/950P is used with the CA-550/550P, powering up may not be executed correctly, depending on the CA-550/550P version. If you wish to use the CA-550/550P instead, please contact your Sony service representative.

Tripod

RCP-700-Series Remote Control Panel (or RM-B150 Remote Control Unit)

Figure 2-4 Optional Accessories for BVP-950/950P

A TOTAL SYSTEM

2-2. Camera Head


BVP-900/900P The BVP-900/900P is an outstanding color video camera which incorporates Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) and 12-bit A/D conversion. Using industry-first CCD imager technology, the BVP-900/900P is easy to upgrade from the 4:3 standard to switchable 16:9/4:3 operation, allowing users to capitalize on the growth in widescreen programming. Using the proven Power HAD 1000 CCD with its excellent highlight handling, the BVP-900/900P provides a 900 TV line resolution and achieves the remarkably low smear level of -145dB (FIT). Just some of the state-ofthe-art features are: * Triple skin tone detail * Adaptive detail control * Fine detail * Electronic soft focus * Adaptive highlight control * Knee saturation * 3-D white shading * Multi matrix control * Skin tone auto iris These improvements contribute to an unsurpassed image quality, making the BVP-900/900P a true top-of-the-line studio/OB camera. BVP-950/950P The BVP-950/950P is the portable version of the BVP-900/900P and has identical video processing circuitry. Both models have the same signal performance and can be controlled either at the camera head or by remote control through studio system peripherals such as the CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit, MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit and CNU-700/CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units. Because of this design concept, users of the BVP-950/950P have the same features, the same operational performance and the same operational feel as the BVP-900/900P an optimized solution to meet the needs of high-end users for a companion studio portable camera. The flexible interfacing of the BVP-900 and BVP-950 (and their respective 625/50 PAL versions the BVP-900P and BVP-950P) means that they are not only high-end broadcasting cameras with the latest technology, but they can also be easily integrated into conventional studio/OB vehicle systems that use earlier BVP-500 Series cameras.

* Up to 2000 m cable length (with 14.5 mm cable, with CCU700A/700AP) * Up to 1000 m cable length (with 8.5 mm cable, with CCU700A/700AP) (c) Enhanced Camera Operator functions * Picture in picture (BVP-900/900P only) * Cursor memory (BVP-900/900P only) * Up to four (BVP-900/900P) or four (BVP-950/950P with CA570/570P) selectable return video feeds (d) Advanced intercom system * Individual ENG/PROD lines * Microphone system * PGM audio system (e) Utility outputs (BVP-900/900P only) * Up to 200VA * 12 V DC output (for script light or wireless microphone receiver) * Prompter output (f) Full companion camera * The BVP-950/950P portable camera has the same picture quality and remote operational controls as the studio/OB camera BVP900/900P (g) Compact size and easy maintenance * Highly sophisticated mechanical design * BVP-900/900P 20.0 Kg (44 lb 1 oz) (without viewfinder) * BVP-950/950P 3.7 Kg (7 lb 5 oz) (with viewfinder and OHB) * All boards plug-in for easy maintenance (h) Convenient return video select Up to four return video signal can be selected for operational convenience. Return video switches and intercom switch are fitted on the carrying handle of the BVP-950/950P to suit various shooting styles. (i) Comfortable BVP-950/950P operation Thanks to a new soft material, the shoulder pad of the BVP-950/950P comfortably molds to the operators shoulder. It incorporates a pivoting chest pad and does not require forward/backward adjustment.

2-3. Camera Control Unit


The CCU-700A/700AP is a camera control unit for use with BVP-900 Series cameras. By incorporating of wideband Triax transmission system and a digital control system, as well as three optional SDI outputs, the CCU-700A/700AP offers maximum camera performance combined with flexible operation. It has been designed to achieve the highest reliability, afford easy maintenance and allow flexible system configuration. The CCU-550/550P Camera Control Unit is also available for use with BVP-950/950P portable cameras. A compact body, two SDI outputs (with a BKP-5972 option fitted) and optional 12 V DC operation (BKP-5974) make this unit ideal for field use.

Main Features of Camera Heads


(a) Excellent Picture Quality * Sensitivity F10.0 at 2000 lx with OHB-750WSA/P, OHB730WS/P and OHB-730/P F8.0 at 2000 lx with OHB-750A/P (3200 K, 89.9% reflectance) * S/N (Typical) 65 dB (NTSC), 63 dB (PAL) * Resolution 900 TVL (4:3 OHB CCD models) * Modulation 80% (at 5 MHz), DTL OFF * Smear level -145 dB (With Power HAD FIT imager installed) * Total absence of lag and highlight artifacts (b) Wide band triax transmission * 10 MHz for luminance channel

Main Features of the CCU-700A/700AP (Camera Control Unit)


(a) Wideband triax transmission * 10 MHz luminance channel for high performance transmission; 6 MHz for each color difference signals * Up to 2000 m cable length (with 14.5 mm cable)
10

A TOTAL SYSTEM
stored in a world-standard PC memory card. (b) Camera Command Network Units (CNU-700 and CNU-500) The Camera Command Network Units are designed to be the nerve center of the Sony camera control system for the BVP-900 Series, BVP-700 Series, BVP-500 Series and HDC-700 Series of cameras. They work as Command Selector, Command Distributor and Command Arbitrator. These two types of camera command network units give a cost/performance choice. The CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to six cameras, while the standard six cameras capability of the CNU-700 can be expanded to 12 cameras with use of the BKP-7930 optional expansion board. With the BKP-7932 optional command conversion board installed instead of the BKP-7930, the CNU-700 can operate with six previous-generation CCU-370/355/350 units as well as six CCU-700A/550 units. The carefully designed software and the high-speed CPU of both the CNU-700 and CNU-500 give them a fast response time whatever the system configuration. (c) Video Selector (VCS-700) The VCS-700 Video Selector is used to switch composite video monitoring signals from a BVP-900 Series multi-camera system to a picture monitor and waveform monitor. The VCS-700 accepts the video monitoring signal from up to six CCU-700A or CCU-550 Camera Control Units and switches these signals to two picture monitor outputs and two waveform monitor outputs. The selection of monitoring signals can be controlled by the camera selection buttons on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, or by external control equipment through the D-sub 37-pin I/O port on the VCS-700. For SDI monitoring, the optional BKP-7933 S-Bus Interface Board provides connection to a Sony digital routing system. (d) Remote Control Panels (RCP-700 Series) There are four ranges of Remote Control Panel for the BVP-900 Series. Each range has two types - joystick control and dial control. The RCP-740/741 is the top of the range for sophisticated operational use, and can be used as a substitute for the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit in some special applications. The RCP-730/731 is the mid-range model with general control function, especially useful for limited space with its slim design. The RCP-720/721 is also a mid-range unit, with sufficient control functions for general use. Finally, the RCP700/701 features the basic control items required for daily operation of acquisition camera systems. The RCP-730/731, RCP-720/721 and RCP-700/701 can all be used as a sub-control panel to support an MSU-700 or RCP-740/741.

* Up to 1000 m cable length (with 8.5 mm cable) * Return video (up to 2000 m with 14.5 mm cable and 1000 m with 8.5 mm cable) * Prompter video (up to 1000 m with 14.5 mm cable and 500 m with 8.5 mm cable) (b) Easy-to-operate command system * Immediate response * Wide range of remote controls (c) Mono color function * Monochrome video is available to VBS and Y, R-Y and B-Y outputs * Hue (360 degrees) and saturation controllable from an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit (d) Character display * Self diagnostics and other information may be displayed on a monitor or superimposed on the picture monitoring output * Characters, such as the camera number, can be superimposed on the internal color bar signal (e) Powerful self-diagnostics system * ISR system interface provided * Triax cable condition and the status of each board can be monitored (f) Component SDI output (option) * Three component SDI outputs are optionally available for interfacing to the ever increasing range of component digital equipment and facilities (g) Built-in contrast and saturation functions * Contrast, saturation and chroma on/off controls provided (h) Flexible intercom system * Individual channels for producer and engineer * 4W, 2W or RTS selectable by internal switch (i) Remotely controllable MIC input gain (camera head) * The gain of the two camera head microphone inputs controllable from the CCU in 10 dB steps (-60 dB ~ -20 dB) (j) Flicker-less sequential mode (RGB) standard for WFM output * RGB sequential monitoring without flicker (k) Compact size and easy maintenance * 19-inch wide and 3U high, including camera power supply unit * Plug-in boards and plug-in power supply unit for easy maintenance

2-4. Control System


(Please refer to section 6. Control System for further information) In addition to the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit and eight different types of RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panels, the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units form the command nerve center for a new concept in camera control system. A wide selection of control peripherals allow each user to configure the most suitable system to meet a specific operational need. The following are the key peripherals. (a) Master Set-up Unit (MSU-700) The MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit can control up to 6 cameras (up to 12 cameras by using an expansion board) in combination with the CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit. The adoption of an EL Touch Panel in the MSU-700 helps to simplify the operation of its sophisticated control system. And data such as scene files can be
11

2-5. Viewfinders
As well as the BVF-77/77CE, a high performance 7-inch monochrome viewfinder with extremely high horizontal resolution, the BVF-7700/7700P 7-inch high grade color viewfinder is also available for the BVP-900/900P. This high grade color viewfinder is especially convenient for cases where color needs to be identified by the camera operator. For the BVP-950/950P, a 5-inch monochrome viewfinder, the BVF-55/55CE, is available. All of these models are very compact in size, light in weight and economical in power consumption. The low mounting positions of the BVF-77 and BVF7700 Series provide convenient viewfinder displays aligned as close as possible to the lens axis.

A TOTAL SYSTEM

- Picture-in-picture Function in Viewfinder (BVP-900/900P only) The viewfinder return video signal can be inserted into any one of the four corners of the viewfinder display. Furthermore, the camera and return video pictures can be interchanged. - Indication of Zoom Position As well as showing the ND/CC filter positions in the viewfinder, lens zoom and iris settings can also be displayed, along with alpha/numeric status displays. - Viewfinder Box Cursor Memory (BVP-900/900P only) Three combinations of box H position, V position, height and width can be memorized and assigned to the three cursor buttons.

2-6. BVP-900/900P Optional System Accessories


For Camera BKP-7910/7910P BKP-7911 BKP-7912

Photo 2-1 BVF-7700/7700P

BKP-7913 For CCU/CNU/MSU BKP-7311 SDI Output Board for CCU-700A/700AP BKP-7312 SDI Return V/F I/P Board for CCU700A/700AP BKP-7900 Extender Board for CCU-700A/700AP and CNU-700/500 BKP-7930 Expansion Board for system expansion up to 12 cameras for the CNU-700 BKP-7931/7931P Sub-encoder Board for the CCU-700A BKP-7932 BVP-370 Series Interface Board for the CNU700 BKP-7933 S-Bus Interface Board for CNU-700 BKP-5972 SDI Output Board for CCU-550/550P BKP-5973 Control Panel for CCU-550/550P BKP-5974 DC Power Unit for CCU-550/550P CCA-5 Cables 8p-8p cables for the CNU-700/500, CCU-700A/550, MSU-700, VCS-700 and RCP-700 Series CCA-5-3 3m CCA-5-10 10 m CCA-5-30 30 m CCZ Cables 26pin-26pin VTR cable CCZ-2 2 m (6.4 ft) CCZ-10 10 m (33 ft)

Standalone unit for the BVP-900/900P Script Holder, one-page type with lamp, for the BVP-900/900P Script Holder, two-page type with lamp, for the BVP-900/900P RTS interface kit for the BVP-900/900P

2-7. A New Series of Viewfinders for the BVP-950/950P


Three types of viewfinders can be used with the BVP-950/950P portable camera to provide the choice required in meeting different applications. These viewfinder models have the following features: BVF-C10W Electronic Color LCD Viewfinder * 1.35-inch, 16:9 widescreen color LCD viewfinder * Incorporates 1.35-inch, wide aspect TFT active matrix color LCD panel with 510,000 dots * Non-interlace, high vertical resolution and less flicker by using a Sony Line Doubler (double-speed conversion) * High resolution of 400 TV lines in both 16:9 and 4:3 modes with excellent color gradation to show the finest detail * 16:9/4:3 automatic switching. When used in 16:9 mode, 4:3 limits and box cursor can be selected to help in shooting 16:9 material that may be converted later into the 4:3 standard * Peaking is shown in yellow for easy focusing * Return signal can be monitored in color * World-wide model automatically responds to the video input standard, NTSC or PAL * High performance, triple magnification lens for better visibility * Removable eye-piece allows direct view of the LCD * Tally lamp for camera operator is located on the viewfinder body
12

Photo 2-2 BVF-55/55CE

A TOTAL SYSTEM
2-8. Rack Mounting of System Equipment
(a) 19-inch size equipment The CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit, CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units, and VCS-700 Video Selector can be mounted in a 19-inch standard EIA rack. These units either mount directly into the rack or with optional slide rails such as the Sony RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail. These slide rails allow the unit to be easily pulled out from the rack and are recommended if you intended to pull out the unit frequently.

so that it can be seen even when not looking at the viewfinder screen. It can be masked with a sliding cover * Supplied with an external microphone

Photo 2-3 BVF-C10W

Warning for Safety Purpose: It takes two or more people to mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by yourself can cause back or other injuries.

BVF-20W(NTSC)/20WCE(PAL) Electronic Black and White CRT Viewfinder * 2-inch 16:9 widescreen B/W CRT viewfinder * High resolution 600 TV lines at center in both 16:9 and 4:3 modes * Diagonal size is 1.5-inch in 4:3 mode and 2.0-inch in 16:9 mode to ensure easy focusing even in 16:9 mode * Removable eye-piece allows direct view of the LCD * Tally lamp for camera operator is located on the viewfinder body so that it can be seen even when not looking at the viewfinder screen. It can be masked with a sliding cover * Removable eye-piece allows direct view of the LCD * Supplied with an external microphone

Mounting the unit directly to the rack Fix the unit to the rack using the rack mount bracket of the unit. Daily maintenance is easy with the unit mounted with this method.
Universal-type rack
12.7 15.9 15.9 12.7

Wide-type rack
12.7 31.75 12.7

Photo 2-4 BVF-20W/20WCE

BVF-10(NTSC)/10CE(PAL) Electronic Black and White CRT Viewfinder * 1.5-inch 4:3 standard B/W CRT viewfinder * High resolution 600 TV lines at center * Diagonal size is 1.5-inch to ensure easy focusing * Tally lamp for camera operator is located on the viewfinder body so that it can be seen even when not looking at the viewfinder screen. It can be masked with a sliding cover * Removable eye-piece allows direct view of the LCD * Supplied with an external microphone

Mounting the unit using the RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail When the RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail is used, the unit can be mounted into a rack with a depth of 660 to 830 mm (26 to 32 3/4 inches). Proceed as follows: 1: Pull out inner member while pushing against the stopper

Stopper Inner member

Outer member

2: Secure the inner members to both sides of the unit with the screws (+B4 x 8). Use the screws removed from or supplied with the unit
Photo 2-5 BVF-10/10CE 13

A TOTAL SYSTEM

6: Pull the rails out.

3: Loosen the screw of the bracket of the outer member 7: Insert the inner member to the outer member while pushing against the stopper, then fully push the unit into the rack. Warning for Safety Purpose: It takes two or more people to mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by yourself can cause back or other injuries. 4: Attach the front and rear brackets of the outer member to the rack. Screws (b), (c) and (d) are supplied with the RMM-30.
Plate nut c Front
12.7 15.9 15.9 12.7 15.9 15.9

Rear

Screw b

31.75

Screw d Front
12.7 31.75 12.7 31.75

Rear

8: Push the unit into the rack, and secure the front panel to the rack with screws (+RK M5 x 16 to 20) and washers (5).

Screw d

31.75

Screw d

When a 1U unit is mounted 1) Attach the front bracket to the inside of the front of the rack at the screw holes at 15.9 mm (22/32 inch) intervals, using screw (b) and plate nut (c). 2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm (1 5/16 inches) intervals, using screws (d). When a unit other than 1U height is mounted 1) Attach the front bracket to the outside of the front of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm intervals, using screws (d). 2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm intervals, using screws (d). 5: Fasten the screws loosened in step 3.

(b) RCP-700 Series and MSU-700 The RCP-700 Series and the MSU-700 can be mounted into a 19-inch rack using an optional drawer. Each type of equipment requires different parts to mount it into the drawer. For details, please contact your local Sony office.

Cover

Drawer RCP-700 Series

14

A TOTAL SYSTEM
(a)Video-signal connections When mixing the character signal with the output signal of the VCS700, set the SYNC ON/OFF switch (S7) on the internal board of the CNU-700 to OFF.

2-9. Basic Connection Examples

RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4

BVP-900-series camera 1

Return video signal


REFERENCE

Reference signal (BB)


PROMPTER REFERENCE
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE

CAMERA

Prompter signal 75-ohm terminator

CCU-700A/700AP

CAMERA
CH-1

MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1

INPUT
REFERENCE

RET2

R-Y

PIX1

VBS2

REMOTE RTS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 RCP/CNU

RET4

CHARACTER PIX2

SYNC

AUX ~ AC IN

REMOTE
MIX

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

COAX
INTERCOM

RET1/RET2/ RET3/RET4 RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4

PROMPTER

R/G/B Y/R-Y/B-Y WF2/PIX2

VBS1/VBS2/VBS3

Switcher, monitor VTR

BVP-900-series camera 2

REFERENCE

Chroma keyer Reference signal (BB)


PROMPTER
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE REFERENCE

CAMERA

CCU-700A/700AP

CAMERA
CH-1

MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1

INPUT

RET2

R-Y

PIX1

VBS2

REMOTE RTS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 RCP/CNU

RET4

CHARACTER PIX2

SYNC

AUX ~ AC IN

REMOTE
MIX

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

COAX
INTERCOM

R/G/B

REFERENCE/ PROMPTER

Y/R-Y/B-Y WF2/PIX2

RET1/RET2/RET3/RET4

VBS1/VBS2/VBS3

Switcher, monitor VTR Chroma keyer

75-ohm terminators
WF1/PIX1 WF2/PIX2 CHARACTER

75-ohm terminator

VCS-700
CHARACTER PIX A/SYNC WF A/WF MODE

Picture monitor Waveform monitor Character monitor

CHARACTER

CHARACTER
3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS AUX1 AUX2

CNU-700

CCU

CCU

10

11

12

10

11

12

MSC

VCS

AUX3

AUX4 ~AC IN

REFERENCE

75-ohm terminator Reference signal (BB or BS)

Figure 2-5

15

A TOTAL SYSTEM

(b)Connection of control, intercom, tally and audio signals

Microphone signal output


MIC OUTPUT
CAMERA
CH-1

CCU-700A/700AP 1
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1

INPUT
REFERENCE R Y WF1

OUTPUT
VBS1 WF MODE

RET2

R-Y

PIX1

VBS2

REMOTE RTS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 RCP/CNU

RET4

CHARACTER PIX2

SYNC

AUX ~ AC IN

REMOTE
MIX

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

COAX
INTERCOM

Microphone control and tally Intercom control and tally Intercom and tally Microphone signal output

MIC REMOTE INTERCOM REMOTE INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

RTS

RCP/CNU

MIC OUTPUT
CAMERA
CH-1

RTS
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1

CCU-700A/700AP 2
OUTPUT
R Y WF1 VBS1 WF MODE REFERENCE

INPUT

RET2

R-Y

PIX1

VBS2

REMOTE RTS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 RCP/CNU

RET4

CHARACTER PIX2

SYNC

AUX ~ AC IN

REMOTE
MIX

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

COAX
INTERCOM

Microphone control and tally Intercom control and tally RTS intercom Intercom and tally

MIC REMOTE INTERCOM REMOTE RTS INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

RCP/CNU

VCS-700
I/O PORT REMOTE

Selection of input signals

CCU 1
1 2

CCU 2
3 CCU 4 5 6 1 2 3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS

VCS
AUX1 AUX2

CNU-700

CCU

10

11

12

10

11

12

MSC

VCS

AUX3

AUX4 ~AC IN

RCP 1

RCP 2

MSU CCU/CNU
REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX
POWER FUSE ~AC IN

I/O PORT

MSU-700
CCU/CNU CCU/CNU

RCP-700 series unit 1


PREVIEW REMOTE CCU/CNU PREVIEW AUX REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX

RCP-700 series unit 2

Switcher

PREVIEW

PREVIEW

Figure 2-6

16

SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES


OHB-750A/750AP 4:3 standard image format FIT CCD sensor, with remote control of its CC/ND filter. OHB-750WSA/750WSAP 16:9/4:3 switchable widescreen image format FIT CCD sensor, with remote control of its CC/ND filter and aspect ratio converter board. OHB-730/730P Fitted with a 4:3 standard image format IT CCD sensor, with remote control of its CC/ND filter. OHB-730WS/730WSP 16:9/4:3 switchable widescreen image format IT CCD sensor, with remote control of its CC/ND filter and aspect ratio converter board.

3-1. Industry-first Plug-in Imager Assembly


The Plug-in Imager Assembly is in the form of a self-contained imaging subsystem. It is, in essence, a miniature plug-in camera containing the CCD block and all its support systems. This imager assembly can be easily removed and installed so that operators with no special skills can easily exchange imager assemblies in the field. There are several types of Imager Assembly. The OHB-750A/750AP is a 2/3-inch 4:3 FIT type CCD and the 750WSA/750WSAP is a 2/3inch 16:9/4:3 switchable widescreen FIT type CCD. For IT types, 4:3 standard screen sized OHB-730/730P and 16:9/4:3 switchable widescreen OHB-730WS/730WSP are available. The latest Power HAD technology achieves superior S/N ratio and extremely low smear level. One very beneficial feature is that no readjustment is required after exchanging these imager assemblies. This breakthrough concept also offers a highly cost-effective way of upgrading CCDs over the camera life span.

3-2. Sony CCD Advantages


Since the early 1970s, Sony has remained in the forefront of CCD

STUDIO/OB

COMPANION PORTABLE

STANDARD

OHB-750WSA/750WSAP 16:9/4:3 switchable 620K FIT (PAL) 520K FIT (NTSC)

OHB-750A/750AP 4:3 620K FIT (PAL) 4:3 520K FIT (NTSC)

BVP-900/900P

OHB-730WS/730WSP 16:9/4:3 switchable 620K IT (PAL) 520K IT (NTSC)

BVP950/950P + CA570/570P

OHB-730/730P 4:3 620K IT (PAL) 4:3 520K IT (NTSC)

ECONOMICAL
Figure 3-1 Optimizing cost / performance choice with alternative OHBs 17

SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES

imager technology with a sustained, broad-ranging research and development program. The benefits of this technological commitment can be seen in the wide range of Sony CCD cameras from mass produced types for consumer use to professional cameras for field and studio operations. The top end of this range has now been further expanded with the introduction of the Power HAD 1000 16:9/4:3 switchable widescreen CCD sensors for the BVP-900 Series.

High picture quality With its extremely high pixel count, the Power HAD 1000 provides a horizontal resolution of over 900 lines, a high depth of modulation of 80% and minimum aliasing. Sony advanced semiconductor technologies also give the Power HAD 1000 high sensitivity and very low smear - despite its large number of picture elements. With the inherent high level of picture quality provided by this imager, the precise picture adjustment capability of digital cameras becomes even more important. Excellent matching of CCD and camera to digital environment The Power HAD 1000 has not just been developed to provide excellent picture quality. When developing a CCD for digital cameras, the relationships between CCD drive clock frequency, digital signal processing sampling rate and the digital VTR sampling rate have to be considered. Simple relationships between these three parameters result in easy signal conversion from CCD output to digital video signal, in turn reducing the complexity of the digital LSIs and reducing camera power consumption. The 18 MHz clock frequency of the Power HAD 1000 was chosen to fulfill this requirement. It has a direct relationship to the 18 MHz and 36 MHz sampling rates in the camera and a simple, 4/3 relationship, to the 13.5 MHz sampling frequency of the Digital BETACAM format.

Photo 3-1 Sony leading technology used in these CCDs is applied in the Power HAD 1000 imager

3-4. High Depth of Modulation


The high packing density achieves an excellent depth of modulation performance of 80 % at 5 MHz.

Total picture performance is a complex function of many attributes in imagery. Improvements in overall camera picture quality are a result of continuing developments of the CCD imager, the CCD support circuitry and video processing. As the CCD imager itself remains central to the direction of recent camera development, enhancements to the total performance of CCDs for broadcasting cameras are of critical importance. For this purpose, Sony developed the Power HAD 1000 and has continuously been refining it ever since.

RESPONSE

1.2 1.0 0.8


0.8

Overrall Y Response (with Optical LPF, without Lens) cf2: Pbo (1-1/4")(XQ3430) cf1: Pbo (2/3")(QX3457)

Power HAD (520,000 pixels) Pbo (1-1/4")(XQ3430) Pbo (2/3")(QX3457)

3-3. Power HAD 1000 CCD


The Power HAD 1000 CCD has 1038 horizontal picture elements, a total of 520,000 for NTSC and 620,000 for PAL. Introduced with the previous generation of cameras, the BVP-500 Series, Sony improved the Hyper HAD 1000 CCD to complement 10-bit DSP. For the new top of the line BVP-900 Series, Sony has developed a totally new and outstanding design of CCD imager to complement its 12-bit ADSP for the following reasons.

0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0 -0.2 -0.4 -0.6 2 4 6 8

10

12

14

16

18

20

HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY (MHz)

Figure 3-2. Depth of Modulation characteristic

3-5. Minimum Aliasing with New Optical Low-Pass Filter


Incorporating the Power HAD 1000 in the BVP-900 Series involves an extremely high sampling rate of 18 MHz. This high clocking rate, in combination with precision CCD spatial offset and the exclusive design of the new optical low-pass pre-filter, reduces aliasing to a level never achieved in previous generations of CCD cameras.

3-6. High Sensitivity


The power HAD 1000 CCD imager inherits the OCL (On-Chip-Lens) technology used in all other Sony broadcast-range cameras. The OCL layer of the CCD chip effectively concentrates the incident light on
18

Photo 3-2. Sony Power HAD 1000 CCDs

SONY ADVANCED ELECTRONIC IMAGING TECHNOLOGIES


Masking
Ai Si Ai Si

the photo sensor area by precisely positioning a microlens over each pixel. As a result, the camera sensitivity is doubled, achieving a figure of F10.0 at 2000 lux with OHB-750WSA/P, OHB-730WS/P and OHB-730/P. (F8.0 with OHB-750A/P.) The following Figure 3-5 shows how the OCL enhances sensitivity.
P+

N+ 2nd P-Well

N+ 1st P-Well

P+
Hole Accumulated Layer

On-Chip-Lens
Al Si Al Si

N-Substrate
Sensor C.S (Channel V-register R.O.G stop) (Read out gate)

P+

N+ 2nd P-Well

Hole Accumulated Layer

N+ 1st P-Well

P+

Figure 3-5 Power HAD 1000 CCD imager

3-8. Excellent Signal-to-Noise Ratio


The superior structure of the Power HAD imager greatly contributes to a reduction in the dark current noise to 1/10 of that in the previous generation of CCDs. This gives a corresponding reduction in the fixed pattern noise, maintaining low noise characteristics in all imaging situations. In combination with an advanced CCD support system, the Power HAD 1000 incorporated in the BVP-900 Series achieves the excellent signal-to-noise ratio of 65 dB (typical) for NTSC and 63 dB (typical) for PAL.

N-Substrate
Sensor C.S (Channel R.O.G stop) V-register (Read out gate)

Sensed light

Figure 3-3 On-chip-lens structure

3-7. Invisible Smear Level 3-9. Super EVS (Enhanced Vertical Definition System)
The OCL layer in the Power HAD imager effectively concentrates the incoming light on the photo sensor so that leakage of light is greatly reduced. The direct result of this is a very low smear level (even on the IT sensors). This further improvement of the masking techniques in the Power HAD 1000 (FIT) has reduced the smear to a level of -145 dB (FIT), which is invisible. The following Figure 3-4 and 3-5 shows the new techniques. The basic Enhanced Vertical Definition System (EVS) can sometimes cause line flicker due to the increase in vertical definition. Super EVS, which is available on BVP-900 Series cameras fitted with FIT sensors, allows the vertical resolution to be enhanced over a range of 400 to 450 lines for NTSC and from 450 to 530 lines for PAL This is achieved by changing the charge mixing ratio in the CCD read out. This function is remotely controlled from the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit and permits the balance between vertical resolution and motion blur to be optimized for different scene contents, while keeping line flicker to a minimum.

3-10. Clear Scan and ECS (Extended Clear Scan)


P+ N+ P+ N+ P+

V-register R.O.G C.S (Read out (Channel gate) stop)

Sensor

Figure 3-4 Smear Pattern of the previous generation of CCDs

The well proven Clear Scan and ECS functions eliminate banding effects when shooting monitor displays by allowing the shutter speed to be adjusted so that it exactly matches the various scanning frequencies that are in use. For FIT CCDs, the Clear Scan shutter speed range is 60.1 to 7000 Hz for NTSC and 50.2 to 9000 Hz for PAL, the ECS range is 30.4 to 58.3 Hz for NTSC and 25.4 to 48.5 Hz for PAL. For IT CCDs it is 60.1 to 7000 Hz for NTSC and 50.2 to 9000 Hz for PAL. The ECS function is especially effective for shooting computer displays that have vertical scanning rates below 60 Hz.

19

SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)


4-2. Image Capture
A wide choice of Optical Head Blocks (OHBs) is available for BVP900/900P and BVP-950/950P cameras. Each camera is fitted with one of four types of 2/3-inch IT or FIT Power HAD 1000 CCDs. The Red, Green and Blue CCD sensors are fixed to the prism block using

4-1. Basic block diagram


The following diagram shows how Sony has applied its innovative skills in semiconductor technology to the design of BVP-900 Series cameras.

3 4

CHU

VF DTL

RC-68 (option)

OHB

AMP

12-bit A/D

+5v +2.5v

R R 12-bit

D/A ARC

Pinp VF out select VF out

R white shading

D/A

R Y/C sep

R
OHB-750A/WA AP/APW

G AMP 12-bit A/D +5v +2.5v G 12-bit SH IE

G PR G ARC D/A
R video

TEST out select

TEST out RM out

B white shading

B D/A

B AMP 12-bit A/D +5v +2.5v B B 12-bit ARC

D/A

G video

D/A B white shading D/A

B video

RET

SRAM

MD-83
YR/-Y,B-Y

DM-97
RET PROMP

PROMOTER

TRIAX

Figure 4-1 ADSP Block Diagram

20

SONY ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ADSP)

Spatial Offset Technology to provide higher resolution. The image captured on the photosensors of each CCD is read out at a clock frequency of 18 MHz.

4-3. Analog Signal Processing Domain


Gain boost process is performed in the analog domain by a Video Amplifier circuit. After that white balance and pre-knee are processed with an AD board. The video signal from the CCD, which can have a dynamic range of 600% of nominal white level, is compressed to approximately 340% by this pre-knee process and converted to a 12bit digital signal at an 18 MHz sampling rate. This is the same sampling frequency as that of the Power HAD 1000 imager.

4-4. Digital Signal Processing Domain


The camera signal processing is executed in the digital domain in BVP-900 Series cameras. Within this digital processing, more than 12 bits are used in critical applications such as shading compensation, image enhancing and gamma correction. As shown in the diagram, three VLSIs are used for processing. In the SH VLSI, the peak and average levels are measured, together with other parameter of the video signal. These measurements are sent to the analog circuits as feedback signals. The PR circuit contains the main camera processing; gamma controls, knee slope controls and so on. The RC circuit is used for aspect ratio conversion between 16:9 and 4:3. The ARC is a separate board supplied with widescreen, switchable, OHB CCDs. The SH, IE, PR and ARC are using the latest VLSI technologies.

21

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

5-1. Full DSP Camera Processing


The BVP-900 Series uses 12-bit A/D conversion based on the latest LSI technology. This advanced technology has allowed Sony to take a major step forward from the 10-bit conversion of its previous generation of cameras a move that was not possible with earlier A/D converters and DSP LSIs. (a) Multi Matrix Multi Matrix is a function that electrically adjusts the basic RGB color taking characteristics of the camera to achieve optimum colorlimetry. It makes it easy to match the color of cameras under multi-camera operations, or to reproduce the characteristics of another type of camera. It can also be used to manipulate color for a particular special effect. A conventional linear matrix function provides only six adjustable parameters, with considerable interaction between their effect on a specific color. Multi Matrix divides the spectrum into 16 segments, each of 22.5 degrees, for each of which there is an independent hue and saturation parameter. Multi Matrix allows the selection of each of these segments, with separate adjustment of hue and saturation parameters. Operation flow is as follows: 1) Select Multi Matrix on the paint menu of the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit. 2) Turn the Matrix and the Multi switches to ON. 3) The MSU-700 EL display now shows a representation of the Multi Matrix as it would appear on a vectorscope. You can select the desired color phase that you want to adjust. 4) After selection of the color phase, its hue and saturation can be adjusted.

4 5

Normal

RY

ON Photo 5-1 Multi Matrix ON and OFF


saturation hue BY

Figure 5-1 Multi Matrix

22

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP


(b) Auto Knee When the Auto Knee button on the MSU or RCP panel is pressed, it optimizes the knee point and knee slope for best reproduction of the high lights. The Adaptive Highlight control function can also be used in conjunction with Auto Knee.
Input signal level

white clip auto slope

Output signal level

Normal

point limit

auto knee circuit

Figure 5-2 Auto Knee curve image

(c) Gamma New 12-bit A/D conversion defines more precisely the required gamma characteristic by using a gamma curve created from 48 segments. This is in comparison with the 32 segments in the previous camera range. (d) Black Gamma Black Gamma allows control of the linear part of the gamma characteristic, providing adjustment of the shadow areas of the picture during shooting. (e) Black Clip Improvements in the Black Clip circuitry have improved the signal/noise ratio for more natural reproduction. (f) Auto Black/White The BVP-900 Series provides perfect accuracy in black and white balance.
ON Photo 5-2 Multi Matrix (Vectorscope)

23

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

5-2. Precise Handling of Highlight Position


(a) Optimized bit assignment The video level up to 260% is processed linearly. Highlights over 260% are compressed by a pre-knee circuit before A/D conversion, providing the most efficient utilization of the 12-bit A/D conversion process. (b) Knee Saturation Knee Saturation eliminates both the washed out effect and hue changes in overexposed areas of a picture, providing more natural color reproduction.

(c) Adaptive highlight control (Auto Knee mode) Conventional cameras only have a single knee point/slope characteristic. In contrast, the Sony ADSP system has multiple knee point/slope characteristics. The camera intelligently monitors the brightness of all areas of the picture and adapts the knee point/slope for optimum reproduction. A typical example is shooting an interior scene which includes a sunlit exterior seen through a window. This new function applies only to video levels in excess of the knee point, the middle and low luminance parts remaining unchanged.
Intput signal level

white clip

5
auto slope

Output signal level

knee point 0

knee point 1

knee point 2

knee point 3

Figure 5-3 Knee curve image

Normal

Normal

ON Photo 5-3 Knee Saturation ON and OFF

ON Photo 5-4 Adaptive highlight control ON and OFF

knee point n

24

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

(d) Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction Skin Tone Detail Correction controls the detail level of those objects which have specific color tones. The BVP-900 Series allows detail to be set independently for each of three separate color ranges. Colors are not limited to skin tones, but can be set for any color. Detail may be increased or decreased relative to the normal level. Phase: Sets the color phase for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated. Width: Sets the color width for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated. Saturation: Sets the saturation for which Skin Tone Detail Correction is activated.
Width RY

Phase BY
Normal

Saturation
Figure 5-4 Skin Tone Detail Correction

CH1 ON

Moderation (Red)

Enhancement (Blue)

CH2 ON Photo 5-5 Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction ON and OFF

25

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

(e) Adaptive Detail Control The Adaptive Detail Control provides natural detail enhancement on extreme highlights by automatically altering the amplitude of the edge signal for those forms of high contrast signals.

Normal

Magnified

ON Photo 5-6 Adaptive Detail Control ON and OFF

Magnified

26

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

(f) Electronic Soft Focus This function is similar to an optical soft filter. By subtracting the edge enhancement signal from the original video signal, slight defocussed pictures are created electronically. This is an important new creative feature that can be used to either complement or replace the Skin Tone Detail Correction function, when more of a film look is sought for close-ups, etc.

Original Enhancer Soft Focus

Figure 5-5 Electronic Soft Focus signal image

Electronic Soft Focus ON

Normal

Detail off Photo 5-7 Electronic Soft Focus ON and OFF

27

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

(g) Skin Tone Auto Iris A problem with conventional auto iris is that movements of bright objects in a scene adversely affects facial exposure a news studio is a typical example. Skin Tone Auto Iris is a function that controls the auto iris system to ensure a constant video level for a defined human skin area within the scene. In the news studio example, when the color phase is adjusted to match the facial tones of the news reader, the iris now maintains the same video level even if the reader turns the script, or people enter or exit the scene. It is effective for the other colors in addition to human skin tone.

(h) 3-D White Shading Correction The camera picture area is divided into up to 1000 separate zones, each of which may have different shading value. The correction is automatically interpolated across adjacent zones. This technique provides precise white shading correction over the whole picture area. The 3D shading mode can be enabled through the camera maintenance menu, and operates automatically each time white shading is performed. Because the camera learns and interpolates the data the accuracy may be improved still further on subsequent auto shading operations. White shading data should be stored in the camera OHB file or will otherwise be lost when the camera power is turned off.

Conventional Correction

3D Shading Correction

Figure 5-6 Correction curve image

(j) Fine Detail The Fine Detail function allows the width of the detail edge to be adjusted without changing the peak level.*
*Effective for H details only.

fine DTL off

fine DTL on

Figure 5-7 Signal curve image

28

BENEFITS OF SONY ADSP

5-3. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance


One of the most important concerns for broadcasters is the reliability of equipment. This is considerably improved with Sony digital processing. In Sony ADSP cameras all the processing parameters are completely and precisely defined at the design stage, and almost all the potentiometers are replaced by semiconductor memories. Consequently, Sony ADSP cameras show extremely stable performance, regardless of environmental conditions such as temperature, humidity, shock and vibration. This high stability, together with the advantages of the self-contained menu system, enables the accurate set-up of camera systems easily for regular realignment to maintain. Finally, a great merit of Sony ADSP cameras is their advanced self-diagnostic system. BVP-900 Series cameras detect problems in their digital processing and provide viewfinder warning indication. Detailed information, such as identifying the faulty board, is also shown on the Master Set-up Unit screen and the Camera Command Network Unit character display to provide easy and rapid fault location.

5-4. Low power consumption


To achieve its design aim of complete digital processing, including digital implementation of the non-linear processing stages, Sony has developed VLSIs which contain over 1,600,000 actual gates. This complexity demonstrates the advances that Sony has made in the application of its semiconductor technology. Despite this complexity, Sony ADSP cameras approach the same low power consumption as previous analog portable cameras. This has been made possible by using the Sony EDA (Electronic Design Automation) system to optimize the complex camera circuitry in a short time scale and to incorporate the latest LSI technologies (2.5 V drive and 0.35 m design rule) to give a total power consumption of just 20 W for the BVP-950/950P portable camera with an OHB-730 CCD block installed.

29

CONTROL SYSTEM
higher operational efficiency. This led to the introduction of the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit. To avoid undue complication of the ergonomics of the panel layout that would result from such extensive access, a novel Electro Luminescent (EL) sub-panel forms an integral part of the overall MSU-700 control panel - Figure 6-1. This menudriven touch screen allows remote pre-programmed and logical access to dozens of technical adjustments. Perhaps no other system can better illustrate the enhanced degree of centralized control than that relating to access to the many adjustments required for the image enhancement system. Depending upon the creative desires of the program director, the MSU-700 allows highly flexible, finger-tip access to all critical adjustments, including skin detail control. The main features of the MSU-700 are given below. (a) Easy operation * Frequently used functions are directly accessed from the panel. * The following modes can be easily accessed by using the new EL touch panel display for maintenance and daily operation. * Paint mode: Various paint items such as White, Black and Flare are adjustable * File mode: Storing, retrieving and transferring reference files, lens files and scene files between camera heads on a PC memory card * Maintenance mode: System phase control, CCU video level alignment, selection of character display from a CNU700 and CNU-500, etc. * Configuration mode: Entire control system configuration, RCP assignment, etc. * Card mode: PC memory card initialize, store to PC memory card/recall from PC memory card, etc. * Multi-mode: Setting of multi-camera operation such as All, Control Priority, Parallel Mode, etc. (b) Multi-MSU operation In a conventional system, a single MSU controls a single studio or multiple studios. However, in this new control system, multiple MSUs can be used to remotely control/supervise a single studio from different operational engineering and control rooms. (c) Standard switch Users standard setting data is easily recalled by pressing the standard switch.

6-1. Sony Camera Command Network System


Several decades of TV operations have led to the development of many alternative operational and engineering philosophies relating to the deployment of video and technical control and to the monitoring and routine maintenance of multi-camera studio and OB truck installations. Sony has re-examined the whole of the studio camera architecture with the goal of structuring a far higher degree of system flexibility. This new architecture is based on: * High-speed communication of digital control commands * A considerably augmented Master Set-up Unit, the MSU-700 * The introduction of a powerful technical nerve center concept the camera Command Network Units, CNU-700 and CNU-500 * Electronically assignable camera remote control panels for use with these camera command network units

5 6

6-2. Master Set-up Unit - MSU-700


The Master Set-up Unit (MSU) is the centralized technical control position for a multi-camera systems. The MSU-700 has been designed to provide comprehensive and wide ranging technical supervision and alignment of a complex camera system from a single centralized panel. If it is desirable in a large program origination complex to extend this supervision to more than one control location (for example, separate operational and engineering/maintenance control centers) then a number of MSU-700 units can access the entire camera system. To exercise maximum flexibility in controlling a multi-camera system, the MSU-700 is designed to work in conjunction with the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Command Network Units. However, if a simplified system is desired, the MSU-700 can also operate as a stand-alone unit. It provides rapid, finger-tip access to all controls relating to the smooth functioning of an operational system, including: * Technical alignment controls for the entire camera chain * Picture and waveform monitor switching * System configuration * Control data filing Extended Technical Access to Camera Video Processing A traditional high-end studio/OB camera chain entails a multiplicity of technical adjustments. In combination they insure ensure both optimization of the technical alignment of the RGB video processing channels and allow a broad degree of control over certain critical video subsystems (such as image enhancement, color reproduction, dynamic range, etc.). Typically, these technical controls are segregated into those requiring regular operational access - and are provided as remote adjustments on video operational panels or technical control panels - and others, perhaps requiring less frequent access, which are relegated to screwdriver adjustments on various circuit boards within the camera head and CCU. This separation often entailed a degree of protracted (and frustrating) re-alignment when subtle creative readjustments are desired for a particular picture composition. In the BVP-900 Series camera system, Sony has adopted the philosophy that all technical controls are important and that remote access to virtually all controls on a single control panel would bring

Photo 6-1. MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit

30

CONTROL SYSTEM
to maintain communication between the CCUs and RCPs in the event of a CNU malfunction or power loss. Therefore, even when the power unit or AT board of the CNU-700 or CNU-500 has failed, camera heads and CCUs can be directly controlled from the RCPs to let program production continue. As mentioned in Section 2, Total System, the cost versus performance balance between the two types of Camera Command Network Unit allows users to build up systems that meet their application needs. The CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to six cameras, while the CNU-700 can be expanded to handle up to 12 cameras with use of the BKP-7930 optional expansion board. Alternatively, with the BKP-7932 optional command conversion board installed instead of the BKP-7930, the CNU-700 can operate with six previous-generation CCU-370/355/350 units as well as six CCU-700A or CCU-550 units. Sophisticated software design and high-speed CPUs in both types of CNU ensure rapid system response in all applications. (a) High-speed data transmission rates CNU to MSU/RCP/CCU: More than 500 Kbps (Approximately 50 times faster than earlier camera command systems) Camera Head to CCU: 35 Kbps (Approximately 15 times the speed of earlier analog camera systems) (b) System configuration Basic system: Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500 Expanded system: Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-700 with one BKP-7930 optional board installed Maximum system: Up to 96 cameras with eight CNU-700 units (each with an BKP-7930 optional board installed) via I/O port on the rear panel (four MSU-700 Master Set-up Units required).

6-3. Camera Command Network Units - CNU-700 and CNU-500


The CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units are designed as the technical nerve center of a Star Shape Network System where all commands such as All, Control Priority, Parallel/Mode, etc. are centralized and distributed to the respective CCUs of the studio system. They are is furnished with an RS-232C port to provide interface capability to external systems such as ISR (Interactive Status Reporting), external PC or modem and robotics control systems. They can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack (3U height for the CNU-700, and 1U height for the CNU-500). Through the modem or PC, camera data file can be transferred from a master camera in a studio to cameras at several remote sites during a live broadcast. By employing a RISC-based microprocessor in the CNU-700 and CNU-500, the communication speed has been greatly improved. Consequently, real-time control and instant response to MSU-700 or RCP-700 Series commands have been made possible. With the combination of one VCS-700 Video Selector with a CNU-700 or CNU500, each of six picture and six waveform monitoring video signals can be handled (and expanded to 96 of each with eight CNU-700 units). Through a CNU-700 or CNU-500, one RCP can control one CCU while one MSU is able to control multiple CCUs. All units connected to the CNU can easily communicate with each other. Because of this useful new facility, simultaneous control of multi cameras, file transfer between multi cameras and control from an external device are now possible. As a convenient tool for system set-up and maintenance, both MSU control routing and CNU control assignment can be displayed on a monitor. Since the CNU is the nerve center of a system, it has a bypass facility

CNU-700 Up to 6 cameras Number of Cameras connectable Up to 12 cameras with BKP-7930 fitted Up to 96 cameras with multi CNU connected Up to 6 RCPs Number of RCPs connectable Multi MSU connectable Multi VCS connectable Other controller connectable Programable with remote control RS-232C connector for ISR RS-232C connector for switcher etc. REF. video in Character out Assignment between RCP and CHU/CCU Power supply to RCP Connect to previous generation's command system such as CCU-370 Height 19-inch standard rack mauntable Table 6-1 A comparison between the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Up to 12 RCPs with BKP-7930 fitted Up to 96 RCPs with multi CNU connected Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes One Two when BKP-7930 fitted Yes 2 Free Yes "Yes, when BKP-7932 installed" 3U Yes

CNU-500 Up to 6 cameras No No Up to 6 RCPs No No No No Available with optional AUX connector No Yes No No Yes 1 Fixed No (But RCP can be powered from CCU) No 1U Yes

31

CONTROL SYSTEM

Command Video Character

BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P

Monitor
Waveform Vector Monitor Scope

6
2 VCS-700

3 CNU-700/500 CCU-550/P 4

B/W monitor for character display BVP-950/P

MSU-700 5

RCP-700 Series

Figure 6-1 CNU-700/500 Basic System Configurations (Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500)

32

CONTROL SYSTEM

Monitor BVP-900/P 1 CCU-700A/P


Waveform Vector Monitor Scope

2 VCS-700 (1) 3 B/W monitor for character display VCS-700 (2)

5
BKP-7930

6 BVP-950/P CCU-550/P 7

CNU-700

MSU-700

10

11

12

Command Video Character

RCP-700 Series

Figure 6-2 CNU-700 Expanded System Configurations (Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-700 with one BKP-7930 installed)

33

CONTROL SYSTEM

BVP-900/P 1 CCU-700A/P - New command system

Monitor
Waveform Vector Monitor Scope

3 BVP-950/P 4

VCS-700 (1)

VCS-700 (2)

6
CCU-550/P B/W monitor for character display

5
BKP-7932

CNU-700

BVP-375/P 7

CCU-370/355/350 Series - Earlier command system RCP-3700 Series

MSU-700

9 BVP-90/P
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
CAMERA POWER
ON

ALARM
CABLE

SHORT OPEN

OFF PANEL ACTIVE

MONITOR BEI EOT


AUTO R G B -G GAMMA ENG MAN KNEE

AUTO SETUP
START AUTO

IRIS

10
USED WITH

TALLY

2
CALL

0 1 2 3

ND

BREAK DETAIL

MAN

FILTER
A B CO 18 9 6 0

GAIN

WHITE

CCU-355 ONLY
POWER
ON

C D

BRACK PGM MIO ON

MASTER BLACK

INCOM OFF

OFF

OUTPUT AUTO CAM PFUV TEST

W/B BAL
AWB MAN

SHUTTER ON

PRESET

ABB

OFF

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT


CAMERA POWER
ON

ALARM
CABLE

SHORT OPEN

OFF PANEL ACTIVE

MONITOR BEI EOT


AUTO R G B -G GAMMA ENG MAN KNEE

AUTO SETUP
START AUTO

IRIS

11
USED WITH

TALLY

2
CALL

0 1 2 3

ND

BREAK DETAIL

MAN

FILTER
A B CO 18 9 6 0

GAIN

WHITE

CCU-355 ONLY
POWER
ON

C D

BRACK PGM MIO ON

MASTER BLACK

INCOM OFF

OFF

OUTPUT AUTO CAM PFUV TEST

W/B BAL
AWB MAN

SHUTTER ON

PRESET

ABB

OFF

CAMERA CONTROL UNIT


CAMERA POWER
ON

ALARM
CABLE

SHORT OPEN

OFF PANEL ACTIVE

MONITOR BEI EOT


AUTO R G B -G GAMMA ENG MAN KNEE

AUTO SETUP
START AUTO

IRIS

12
USED WITH

TALLY

2
CALL

0 1 2 3

ND

BREAK DETAIL

MAN

FILTER
A B CO 18 9 6 0

GAIN

WHITE

CCU-355 ONLY
POWER
ON

C D

BRACK PGM MIO ON

MASTER BLACK

INCOM OFF

OFF

OUTPUT AUTO CAM PFUV TEST

W/B BAL
AWB MAN

SHUTTER ON

PRESET

ABB

OFF

Command Video Character

RCP-700 Series

Figure 6-3 CNU-700 Mixed Configurations (With New and earlier command system components)

34

6
1

CONTROL SYSTEM

BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P VCS-700 (1) VCS-700 (2)

B/W monitor for character display

BKP-7930

CNU-700 (1) 12 BVP-950/P CCU-550/P 13 MSU-700 14 CNU-700 (2)


BKP-7930

18

19 VCS-700 (4) 20 VCS-700 (3)

24

Command Video Character

Monitor

Waveform Vector Monitor Scope

Note:
With the addition of an external camera selector switching panel, upto 96 cameras with 8 CNU-700s (with BKP-7930 installed) can be controlled from a single MSU-700.

RCP-700 Series

RCP-700 Series

Figure 6-4 CNU-700 Maximum System Configurations (expandable to 96 cameras)

35

CONTROL SYSTEM

BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P

ENGINEERING ROOM

MSU-700 VCS-700

BVP-950/P CCU-550/P

CNU-700 (1)

MSU-700

RCP-700 Series

VIDEO CONTROL ROOM

Figure 6-5 Multi-MSU Operation Example (1)

36

CONTROL SYSTEM

Supervising a complete system with a supervisiory MSU STUDIO 1 BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P VCS-700 MSU-700

CNU-700

RCP RCP

STUDIO 2 BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P VCS-700

MSU-700

CNU-700

STUDIO 3 BVP-900/P CCU-700A/P VCS-700

MSU-700

CNU-700

MSU-700

Supervisory MSU

Figure 6-6 Multi-MSU Operation Example (2)

37

CONTROL SYSTEM

(c) Character display Information concerning the camera heads and CCUs connected to the CNU-700 and CNU-500 can be displayed on a monitor via the CHARACTER connector. This includes: * Camera settings * System connection information * Results of Auto set-up * Self-diagnostics information (d) Emergency feature In the event of a problem with the CNU-700 and CNU-500, turning their internal OPERATION switch to the EMERGENCY position allows control signals from the remote control panel to be directly connected to the camera head. In this way, program production can continue by bypassing the CNU.

6-4. Remote Control Panels - RCP-700 Series


The RCP-700 Series of Remote Control Panels consists of four ranges, from basic to advanced production control to meet operational requirements. Each range includes both a joystick type (e.g. RCP-xx0) and a dial control type (e.g. RCP-xx1). (a) RCP-740/741 The RCP-740 is a joystick type of Remote Control Panel while the RCP-741 is a dial type. Both are top of the range models with the full control functions required for sophisticated operations. All operational functions, including Paint, can be controlled directly from the remote control panel rather than by using menu selection as in the previous model. For some special applications, these RCPs can be used as an alternative to the MSU-700. Up to three of RCP740/741 can be mounted in a 19-inch standard rack drawer.

(b) RCP-720/721 The RCP-720 (joystick type) and RCP-721 (dial control type) make up the standard panel range. They include Auto Set-up, Scene File and normal Painting functions to meet the requirements for middle to large size studios and OB units. The RCP-720 and RCP-721 are principally designed for use in combination with MSU-700. Up to four of these RCPs can be installed in a 19-inch standard rack drawer. (c) RCP-700/701 The RCP-700 (joystick type) and RCP-701 (dial control type) are normally used in combination with the MSU-700. However, they can also be used as a sub-control panel with other types of RCPs to provide basic red and blue Paint facilities, Master Black and Iris control in daily operations. (d) RCP-730/731 The RCP-730 (joystick type) and RCP-731 (dial control type) have a slim design to fit in a compact space such as 19-inch EIA rack drawer. They feature an LCD panel for displaying Paint Control items, and to enhance the ON/OFF function of the SW Controls such as Knee, Detail, Gamma, Knee Saturation, Mono Color, Color Corrector, etc. The LED BAR for IRIS display featured on the RCP-740 is also available on the RCP-730 (but not on the RCP-731 dial control type). (e) Flexible Assignment of RCPs The CNU-700 is at the heart of the star-shaped network system. Its internal data routing matrix, controlled from the MSU-700, allows any RCP to be assigned to control any camera without reconnecting cables between camera heads and RCPs. Please refer to Figure 6-7. * Multi camera control from one remote panel * Parallel control of a camera from multiple remote panels

38

CONTROL SYSTEM

Extremely Flexible Configuration


- When ex-factory The assignments between CCUs and RCPs are set as below.
BVP-900/P 1 2 3 4 5 BVP-950/P 6
CCU 6

CNU-700
CCU-700A/P
CCU 2

CCU 2

VCS 1

VCS-700

CCU 3

CCU 4

MSU-700
MSU 1

CCU 5

RCP 1

RCP 2

RCP 3

RCP 4

RCP 5

RCP 6

RCP-740/741

- For flexibility, assignments can be easily changed e,g CAM 1 controlles from RCP 1&2, CAM 2 controlled from RCP 3&4, CAM 3 controlles from RCP5, and CAM 5 controlled from RCP 6
BVP-900/P 1 2 3 4 5 BVP-950/P 6
CCU 6

CNU-700
CCU-700A/P
CCU 2

CCU 2

VCS 1

VCS-700

CCU 3

CCU 4

MSU-700
MSU 1

CCU 5

RCP 1

RCP 2

RCP 3

RCP 4

RCP 5

RCP 6

RCP-740/741

Figure 6-7 Flexible Assignment of RCPs

39

CONTROL SYSTEM

6-5. File System


An innovative PC memory card allows users to store and recall camera and system data including assignment control. Camera parameters can be individually handled by storing a reference file and scene file in a commercially available PC memory card. Depending on the capacity of the memory card, a large number of file groups (each containing up to five scene files and one reference file) can be stored. Individual customization with this PC memory card system enables special artistic camera settings to be stored and recalled immediately.

complex system configuration assigned from the MSU-700 via the CNU-700/500. Memorized parameters can be accurately retrieved at any time and from any camera.

6-6. Auto Set-up


BVP-900 and BVP-950 cameras incorporate a sophisticated Auto Setup system to adjust the video processing circuitry parameters for optimum color matching. In addition to auto white balance, auto black balance and auto level set-up, the following parameters can also be adjusted according to a reference file. * Auto white shading (The shading compensation is achieved with horizontal and vertical sawtooth and parabolic waveform as well as with a digitally synthesized waveform for almost 1000 individual correction zones created by DSP.) * Skin detail auto hue (automatic hue detection for specified color range, with full skin detail function.)

6-7. Control Priority and Parallel Mode


(a) Control Priority When a camera system is configured using the CNU-700 or CNU500, each camera can be connected in parallel to both an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel and the MSU-700 Master Setup Unit, and is controlled from whichever unit has control priority. Priority for iris/master black adjustments only can be obtained, when the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button on the panel on which the PANEL ACTIVE button is not lit. When the MSU-700 is in the panel active status, only the iris and master black controls inoperative on the MSU-700 can be set by pressing the lit IRIS/MB ACTIVE button. (b) Parallel Mode The MSU-700 and RCP-720/721/730/731/740/741 panels have a PARA button to select Parallel Mode. When the PARA button of the unit is pressed and lit, Parallel Mode is activated and all the control functions, other than the iris/master black controls, become operative from both units. The Parallel Mode can be canceled by pressing the PARA button of the MSU-700 or RCP-700 Series control panel.

Photo 6-2 PC Memory Card

The file system of BVP-900 Series cameras includes reference file, scene file and lens file. The reference file stores the standard set-up data in the auto set-up mode plus the standard setting of those switch functions which are not executed with the auto set-up mode. The scene file stores paint data for each scene, and up to five scene files can be stored in the BVP-900 system. The lens file contains data to compensate for various errors induced by the lens, and data on 15 types of standard lens is preset in the factory. (Up to 50 lens fits.) The BVP-900 Series detects the type of lens and uses the appropriate data automatically. If necessary, the lens data can be modified by users. The data to compensate for any errors induced by the CCD imager and optical system, such as black shading, white shading, black set and flare, is separately stored in the optical head block of the OHB750A/730 Series. (a) File transfer capability With the file transfer function, reference file and scene file data can be transferred among multiple cameras, or between camera heads and the MSU-700. In a multi-camera operation system, optimum picture matching is simply and easily achieved by transferring the appropriate camera setting data from the master camera to other slave cameras via the CNU-700 or CNU-500. Thus, any camera can be set to a uniform condition once a master camera is specifically adjusted. (b) PC memory card The complete setting of a camera, including reference file and scene files, can be stored in a small PCMCIA-standard PC memory card. This unique memory card facility also stores information such as a

6-8. S-Bus Control


(a) The S-Bus Concept A further advantage of the Sony camera control system is the S-Bus control technique, which is based on an original Sony concept. Studio installations and OB units use digital routers as the nerve center for a complete audio/video system. With Sony system integration, all the equipment is connected to the Sony digital router via a LAN, called the S-Bus. With the S-Bus system, control and tally signals are interlocked so that they, along with video and audio signals, can be simultaneously switched from a central terminal. Each input/output source can be given a name, which can then be displayed on the source name display panel of a DVS-7000 Series Video Switcher or on the BKS-R3280/R3281 Status Character Display. One example of the operational advantages of the S-Bus system is that the routing of input signals to the primary inputs to a DVS-7000
40

CONTROL SYSTEM

Series Video Switcher can be changed at any time without having to re-connect cables. Even the source name display, tally signal and tally display are interlocked and changed automatically. (b) Sony camera command system with S-Bus * Controlling the router from an MSU panel The digital routers cross point can switched from the MSU-700 by pressing its camera select button. SDI video monitoring is enabled.

PIX CNU with BKP-7933 SDI

CNU character MSU-700

CCU with A/D boad

IN1 IN2 CCU with A/D boad IN5 CCU with A/D boad Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station OUT25
PIX WFM

SDI Monitor from MSU camera select

S-BUS BNC CCA-5 Video BNC


Figure 6-8 Router control from MSU

* Interlocking the RCP Assignment and WFM/PIX Assignment When the assignment of any RCP is changed from the MSU-700, the picture and waveform monitoring is also automatically changed to follow the new arrangement.

1CAM monitor

2CAM monitor

3CAM monitor

4CAM monitor

5CAM monitor

5CAM monitor
PIX WFM

4CAM monitor
PIX WFM

3CAM monitor
PIX WFM

2CAM monitor
PIX WFM

1CAM monitor
PIX WFM

Control 1CAM

Control 2CAM

Control 3CAM

Control 4CAM

Control 5CAM

Control 5CAM

Control 4CAM

Control 3CAM

Control 2CAM

Control 1CAM

When the RCP assignment is canged, PIX/WFM video is also changed automatically.
Figure 6-9 Interlocking RCP and monitor assignment

41

CONTROL SYSTEM

* Controlling the router from an RCP Pressing the preview switch on an RCP-700 Series control panel switches the appropriate digital router cross point. SDI video monitoring is enabled.

PIX CNU with BKP-7933 SDI

CNU character MSU-700

CCU with A/D boad

IN1 IN2 CCU with A/D boad IN5 CCU with A/D boad Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station OUT1 OUT2 OUT5

SDI Monitor for RCP


PIX WFM

6
PIX WFM

S-BUS BNC CCA-5 Video BNC


PIX WFM

Figure 6-10 Router control from an RCP

* Controlling the RCP assignment from other S-Bus equipment All S-Bus equipment detects the connection configurations between camera heads, CCUs and RCPs by communicating with each other. This means that other S-Bus equipment can change the assignment of RCPs in a system that does not include an MSU-700
(IN1 to 5) PIX1 video in (IN13 to 17)WF1 video in (OUT1 to 5)PIX1 video out (OUT13 to 17)WF1 video out

CNU with BKP-7933 CCU PIX1 WF1 IN1 IN2 CCU WF1 PIX1 CCU WF1 IN13 IN14 IN17 Router (DVS-V3232 etc.) Primary Station PIX1 IN5

PIX

CNU character

OUT1 OUT2 OUT5 OUT13 OUT14 OUT17

PIX/WF Monitor for RCP S-BUS BNC CCA-5


PIX WFM PIX WFM PIX WFM

RCP Remote Assign Panel

Video BNC

Figure 6-11 Remote control of the RCP assignment without an MSU-700

42

CONTROL SYSTEM

* Camera name display onto CNU Sony uses a PC as the primary control station of a digital router. Each camera can be given a name with this primary PC, and these names are then automatically shown on the CNU character display. * Serial Tally Transfer Decodes S-Bus serial tally signal and forward to CCU.
* A CNU-700 requires a BKP-7933 option for S-Bus functionality.

S-BUS Tally
TOP MENU
KEY 1 KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS PATERN WIDTH KEY PAD

Current Tally
TOP MENU
KEY 1 KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS PATERN WIDTH KEY PAD

M/E-1
KEY 1 KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS

1
MODIFY 1 LUM

M/E-1
KEY 1 KEY PAD MODIFY 2 SAT KEY 2 WIPE DME CHR KEY BKGD TRANS

1
MODIFY 1 LUM

M/E-2

M/E-2

2
MODIFY 2 SAT

KEY PAD

AUX DELEGATION

DSK 1

DSK 2

WIPE

DME

CHR KEY

BKGD TRANS

3
DIRECT POSIT HUE KEY PAD

AUX DELEGATION

DSK 1

DSK 2

WIPE

DME

CHR KEY

BKGD TRANS

3
DIRECT POSIT HUE KEY PAD

PGM/PST
DSK DSK WIPE P/P WIPE P/P DSK DME FRAME MEN 1 FRAME MEN 2 STATS

PGM/PST

4
USER WIPE

DSK

DSK WIPE

P/P WIPE

P/P DSK DME

FRAME MEN 1

FRAME MEN 2

STATS

4
USER WIPE

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

EDIT

FRAME MEM 1

FRAME MEM 2

M/E1

M/E2

P/P UTIL

KEY FRAME

PROG

DISK

STILL PILE

CHR KEY

SETUP

DLAG

KEY PAD

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

EDIT

SYSTEM
BKGD MODE FREZE REOUR PIC MOD VIDEO MOD IN OUT

FRAME MEM 1

FRAME MEM 2

M/E1

M/E2

P/P UTIL

KEY FRAME

PROG

DISK

STILL PILE

CHR KEY

SETUP

DLAG

KEY PAD

SYSTEM
BKGD MODE FREZE REOUR PIC MOD VIDEO MOD IN OUT

SHIFT
NONLINER GRAPH LIGHT OFF DME STATS DME SETUP

SHIFT
NONLINER GRAPH LIGHT OFF DME STATS DME SETUP

UTILITY

UTILITY

SHIFT

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

EXIT

SHIFT

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

EXIT

AUX

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2

PGM

AUX

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2

PGM

M/E-1 K1 K2
M/E

ON OVER KEY

ON OVER KEY 2 KEY XPT KEY KEY KEY 2

KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4

M/E-1 K1 K2
M/E

ON OVER KEY

ON OVER KEY 2 KEY XPT KEY KEY KEY 2

KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4

BKGD
M/E

BKGD
M/E

NEXT TRANSITION MIX NAM SUPER WIPE

SHIFT

9
MATTE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT

NEXT TRANSITION MIX NAM SUPER WIPE

SHIFT

9
MATTE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT

DME

6
LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC

DME

6
LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2

WIPE

2
EFF DISS

3
AUTO TRANS

WIPE

2
EFF DISS

3
AUTO TRANS

TRANSITION TYPE

TRANSITION TYPE

AUX BUS

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 2

AUTO

CUT

SNAP SHOT

KEY

KEY

KEY

KEY

KEY1

KEY2

M/E-2 K1 K2
M/E

ON XPT KEY OVER KEY

ON OVER KEY 2 KEY KEY KEY 2

KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4

BKGD
M/E

SHIFT

9
MIX

NEXT TRANSITION NAM SUPER MATTE WIPE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT

DME

6
DME 1 FRAMES DME 2 LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1
WIPE

2
EFF DISS

3
AUTO TRANS

TRANSITION TYPE KEY KEY KEY KEY

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

SNAP SHOT

AUTO

CUT

KEY1

KEY2

PGM/PST DSK1 DSK2


M/E M/E

ON OVER DSK

ON OVER

DOWN STREAM KEYER


EFF SNAP ALL

MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL

AUX BUS

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 2

AUTO

CUT

SNAP SHOT

KEY

KEY

KEY

KEY

KEY1

KEY2

M/E-2 K1 K2
M/E

ON XPT KEY OVER KEY

ON OVER KEY 2 KEY KEY KEY 2

KEY CONTROL
1 2 3 4

BKGD
M/E

SHIFT

9
MIX

NEXT TRANSITION NAM SUPER MATTE WIPE AUTO SPLIT BORD DROP SHDW OUT

DME

6
DME 1 FRAMES DME 2 LUM LIN CLEAN CHR PTN KEY PROC

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1
WIPE

2
EFF DISS

3
AUTO TRANS

TRANSITION TYPE KEY KEY KEY KEY

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

SNAP SHOT

AUTO

CUT

KEY1

KEY2

PGM/PST DSK1
M/E M/E

ON OVER DSK

ON OVER

DOWN STREAM KEYER


EFF SNAP ALL

MASTER E-FILE CONTROL PANEL

BKGD
M/E M/E

DSK 2

KEY

DSK

DSK 2
DME M/E

BKGD

DSK 2

KEY

DSK

DSK 2
DME M/E

TRANS RATE 7 8 9
EFF DIS CLR

TRANS RATE 7 8 9
EFF DIS CLR

NEXT TRANSITION MIX NAM SUPER WIPE

3
DSK1

MATTE

AUTO

SPLIT

BORD

DROP

SHDW

OUT

DSK2

M/E

M/E

NEXT TRANSITION MIX NAM SUPER WIPE

3
DSK1

MATTE

AUTO

SPLIT

BORD

DROP

SHDW

OUT

DME

M/E

LASTX

PGM

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2

LUM

LIN

CLEAN

PTN

KEY

PROC

AUTO TRANS TRIM

DME

M/E

LASTX

PGM

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2
FRAMES DME 1 DME 2

LUM

LIN

CLEAN

PTN

KEY

PROC

AUTO TRANS TRIM

2
DME P/P DSK 3

STORE LEARN 1 2 3

2
DME P/P DSK 3

STORE LEARN 1 2 3

TRANSITION TYPE

XPT DSBL

TRANSITION TYPE

XPT DSBL

PST

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2

AUTO

3
CUT

4
DSK2

DSK

DSK

DSK

DSK

FADE TO BLACK

DME 4

DME

USER

RCALL

ENTER

PST

BLACK

COLOR BKGD

SHIFT

M/E 1

M/E 2

AUTO

3
CUT

4
DSK2

DSK

DSK

DSK

DSK

FADE TO BLACK

DME 4

DME

USER

RCALL

ENTER

DSK1

DSK2

DSK1

DSK2

DVS-7250system

DVS-7250system

CNU

S-BUS

RS-422A CNU Tally Decoder

S-BUS

RS-422A

Tally Decoder

CCA-5 cable
CCU CCU CCU CCU

Figure 6-12 Current tally and S-Bus tally

43

WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION


transmission system, the R, B and G signals are linearly summed to form a luminance (Y) signal before triax transmission. Precise phase offset is maintained between the R, B and G signals by this spatial offset process. Thus, the inevitable differential time delays between channels of an RGB system are avoided. The Sony Wideband Triax Transmission System provides the following advantages, when used with the CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit. * Long triax cable operation, up to 2000 m with 14.5 mm cable with return video (up to 1000 m with 8.5 mm cable) * Teleprompter video channel up to 1000 m with 14.5 mm cable (500 m with 8.5 mm cable) * Skin tone gate transmission for picture monitor * Outstanding horizontal resolution of 850 TV lines at CCU output

7-1. Advantages of Sony Wideband Triax Transmission


To avoid the differential time delays and differential gain that may arise with RGB systems, the Sony Wideband Triax Transmission system uses video component signals (Y, R-Y, B-Y). The luminance Y signal bandwidth is 10 MHz, and that of the color difference signals is 6 MHz. The color difference signals are transmitted by quadrature modulation of a signal carrier, providing high efficiency in spectrum utilization. All components employ full double-sideband amplitude modulation with synchronous detection. This affords maximum signal-to-noise ratio and optimum high frequency response. This component (Y, R-Y, B-Y) transmission method is perfectly suited to CCD cameras that incorporate Spatial Offset technology for higher resolution and minimum aliasing. In a component (Y, R-Y, B-Y)

Frequency Allocation for CCU-700A/P (Wideband)


CHU 22.5 MHz 10 MHz CCU 45M Hz 6M Hz CCU CHU CHU CCU

70M Hz 7M Hz RET VIDEO (FM)

97.25 MHz 5.5 MHz PROMPTER (AM)

Y R-Y/B-Y (QUAD-DSB) (QUAD-DSB) AUDIO AND DATA 10 Skin Gate (2 MHz)

20

40 H.CONT (FOR GENLOCK) CCU DATA

60

70

90

100

MHz

CAM DATA & TONE

INCOM 1 INCOM 2 PGM

2.5 3.0

3.6 3.9 4.3

5.6 6.2

6.7 7.1 7.4

CCU

CHU CHU AUDIO and DATA

Figure 7-1 Frequency Allocation for CCU-700A/700AP

MIC 2 INCOM 1 INCOM 2 CCU

MIC 1

44

WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION


Standard Bandwidth Triax System Wideband Triax System

5 MHz

6.7 MHz

Transmission characteristic 5 MHz Wideband Triax System Standard bandwidth Triax System 0.5 dB 0.5 dB 6.7 MHz 0.5 dB - 2.0 dB

Figure 7-2 Transmission Characteristic

Photo 7-1 The rotary type triax connector of BVP-900/900P

Photo 7-2 The rotary type triax connector of BVP-950/950P

45

WIDEBAND TRIAX TRANSMISSION

7-2. Triax Cable Information


Maximum cable length with CCU-700A/700AP and CCU-550/550P The maximum cable length can be extended up to 3000 m via 14.5 mm triax cable without return video. Range of operation is dependent upon cable type.

With CCU-700A/700AP Cable Mohawk Mohawk Belden Belden Fujikura Fujikura F&G Table 7-1 Triax cables Thickness 8.5 mm 13.2 mm 8.5 mm 13.2 mm 8.5 mm 14.5 mm 11 mm Max. length 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 1500 m (almost 0.9 mile) 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 1500 m (almost 0.9 mile) 1000 m (almost 0.6 mile) 2000 m (almost 1.2 mile) 1200 m (almost 0.8 mile)

With CCU-550/550P Max. length 700 m (almost 0.42 mile) 1050 m (almost 0.63 mile) 700 m (almost 0.42 mile) 1050 m (almost 0.63 mile) 700 m (almost 0.42 mile) 1400 m (almost 0.85 mile) 875 m (almost 0.56 mile)

46

SET-UP MENUS
combination of a rotary encoder and a toggle switch on the rear control panel. For the BVP-950/950P, a convenient rotary encoder on the front panel of the camera head is used for menu selection. Both the BVP-900/900P and BVP-950/950P have User menus and Engineering menus. When the menu system is initially accessed, the Operation Menu pages are displayed. A special combination of the menu controls allows access to the Top Menu which, in turn, provides access to the other menus depending on whether or not they have been selected by dip switches on the AT board.

In Sony DSP cameras, complicated setting up procedures are virtually eliminated because all parameters are stored in memory as digital values. In typical system installations these parameters are adjusted using the MSU or the RCPs. However, both the BVP-900/900P and BVP950/950P can be used in standalone applications and in these situations control values can be changed using a series of viewfinder menus. These menus are accessed by using the menu switches on the camera head. The menu selection for the BVP-900/900P is by a

Photo 8-1 Rotary menu encoder on the front panel of the BVP-950/950P

Photo 8-2 Menu encoder on the rear control panel of the BVP-900/900P

47

SET-UP MENUS

The following tables give brief explanations of the menus. For more detail, please refer to the system manual.
Item ALL Cam Power VF Power TEST 1 TEST 2 Bars Close Standard Knee Off Detail Off Gamma Off Chroma Off Matrix Off Knee Aperture Knee Saturation 5600K Auto Knee Skin Detail Detail Gate Saturation Contrast Black Gamma Character V Mod. Saw Master V Mod.Saw R,G,B Mod.Saw V Mod. Saw Off Detail Detail Level limiter Crispening Level Dep. H/V ratio Frequency Mix Ratio Detail Comb White limiter Black limiter Fine Detail Knee Aperture Detail Off Level Dep. Off Fine Detail Off Knee Aperture On Skin Detail Skin Detail Skin 1 Level Skin 1 Phase Skin 1 Width Skin 1 Sat Skin 1 On Skin 1 Gate On Detail Gate On Skin 2 Level Skin 2 Phase Reference File No No No No No No No No Yes No (On) No (On) No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No (On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes After Reference Stored No Change On On No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change Scene File No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Change Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Lens File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Standard No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File On On No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Lens File To Lens File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File Level Auto No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File On On No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Lens File To Lens File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File
Test 2 waveform is selected at MSU.

Table 8-1 Function and File table for BVP-900/900P

48

SET-UP MENUS
Item Skin 2 Width Skin 2 Sat Skin 2 On Skin 1 Gate On Skin 3 Level Skin 3 Phase Skin 3 Width Skin 3 Sat Skin 3 On Skin 3 Gate On Reference File Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (G) (G)(RGB) Yes No (On) Yes Yes Yes Yes No (On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No (Off) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No (On) Yes Yes No (On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes After Reference Stored No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear On 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear On No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change Off No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear On 0 Clear 0 Clear On No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Scene File Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Lens File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File Off To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File Off To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File
Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value.

Standard To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File *1

Level Auto To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File
Depends on White Setup mode *1) To previous Level Auto Data

SAT/CONTRAST

Saturation Contrast Saturation On Contrast On

Black

Master Black R,G,B Black Auto Black Balance

White Flare Gamma Knee

R,G,B White R,G,B Flare Flare Off Master Gamma Master Black Gamma Master Knee Point Master Knee Slope Gamma Off Black Gamma On Knee Off

Knee Point

Master Knee Point R,G,B Knee Point Auto Knee Knee Max On Knee Off

Knee Slope

Master Knee Slope R,G,B Knee Slope Auto Knee Knee Off

Knee Sat White Clip

Level Knee Sat. On Master White Clip R,G,B White Clip White Clip Off

Gamma

Master Gamma R,G,B Gamma Gamma Off Gamma 0.40 Gamma 0.45 Gamma 0.50

Black Gamma

Master BlackGamma R,G,B Black Gamma Master Black Gamma C

Auto Knee

Point Limit Slope Adaptive Highlight Control Auto Knee On Knee Off

Auto Iris

Pattern Phase

Table 8-1 Function and File table for BVP-900/900P

49

SET-UP MENUS

Item Width Auto Iris Normal Mode Skin Mode Auto Hue Auto Iris Gate Gate On Level APL Gain Pattern Select ECS/S-EVS Shutter Speed ECS Speed Super EVS Speed Shutter On ECS On Super EVS On Matrix R-G/G-B/B-R R-B/G-R/B-G Matrix Off Preset Matrix User Matrix Black Shading R,G,B H Saw R,G,B V Saw R,G,B H Para R,G,B V Para Pattern Select White Shading R,G,B H Saw R,G,B V Saw R,G,B H Para R,G,B V Para R,G,B 3D Shading OHB Multi Matrix Hue Saturation Matrix Off OHB Matrix On Test 2Mode White Setup Mode No OHB Matrix Correct Auto White Shading Mode V Detail Correction Mode 16:9/4:3 Crop V detail Control Mode

Reference File Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No Change No No Yes No Yes

After Reference Stored No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change

Scene File Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No Yes No No

OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No

Lens File No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Change No No No No No

Standard To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Lens File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File

Level Auto To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Lens File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File Installation mode only
Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Gain is stored to Lens File.

Table 8-1 Function and File table for BVP-900/900P

50

8
ALL Cam Power VF Power Test 1 Test 2 Bars Close Standard Knee Off Detail Off Gamma Off Chroma Off Matrix Off Knee Aperture Knee Saturation 5600K Auto Knee Skin Detail Detail Gate Saturation Contrast Black Gamma Character V Mod. Saw

SET-UP MENUS
Item Reference File No No No No No No No No Yes No (On) No (On) No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Master V Mod. Saw R.G.B Mod. Saw V Mod. Saw Off No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No(On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No After Reference Stored No Change On On No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Scene File No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Change Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Lens File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Standard No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File On On No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Lens File To Lens File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change Level Auto No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File On On No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Lens File To Lens File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change
Test 2 waveform is selected at Camera config Menu.

Detail

Detail Level Limiter Crispening Level Dep. H/V ratio Frequency Mix Ratio Detail Comb White Limiter Black Limiter Fine Detail Knee Aperture Detail Off Level Dep. Off Fine Detail Off Knee Aperture On

Skin Detail

Skin 1 Level Skin 1 Phase Skin 1 Width Skin 1 Sat Skin 1 On Skin 1 Gate On Detail Gate On Skin 2 Level Skin 2 Phase Skin 2 Width Skin 2 Sat Skin 2 On Skin 2 Gate On

Table 8-2 Function and File table for BVP-950/950P

51

SET-UP MENUS

Item Skin 3 Level Skin 3 Phase Skin 3 Width Skin 3 Sat Skin 3 On Skin 3 Gate On SAT/CONTRAST Saturation Contrast Saturation On Contrast On Black Master Black R.G.B Black Auto Black Balance White Flare Gamma Knee R.G.B White R.G.B Flare Flare Off Master Gamma Master Black Gamma Master Knee Point Master Knee Slope Gamma Off Black Gamma On Knee Off Knee Point Master Knee Point R.G.B Knee Point Auto Knee Knee Max On Knee Off Knee Slope Master Knee Slope R.G.B Knee Slope Auto Knee Knee Off Knee Sat White Clip Level Knee Sat On Master White Clip R.G.B White Clip White Clip Off Gamma Master Gamma R.G.B Gamma Gamma Off Gamma 0.40 Gamma 0.45 Gamma 0.50 Black Gamma Master Black Gamma R.G.B Black Gamma Master Black Gamma Or Auto Knee Point Limit Slope Adaptive Highlight Control Auto Knee On Knee Off Auto Iris Pattern Phase Width Auto Iris Normal Mode Skin Mode

Reference File Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes(G) (G)(RGB) Yes No(On) Yes Yes Yes Yes No(On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No(On) Yes Yes No(On) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes

After Reference Stored 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change Yes On 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear On No Change No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change Off No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear On 0 Clear 0 Clear On 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change 0 Clear 0 Clear No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change

Scene File Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No 0 Clear No No No No No No No No No No No

Lens File No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Standard To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File *1 To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File Off To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File

Level Auto To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File
Depends on White Setup Mode *1) To previous Level Auto Data

To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File Off To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File On To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File
Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value. Data is stored as RGB value.

Table 8-2 Function and File table for BVP-950/950P

52

8
ECS/S-EVS

SET-UP MENUS
Item Auto hue Auto Iris Gate Gate On Shutter Speed ECS Speed Super EVS Speed Shutter On ECS On Super EVS On Reference File No No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes No Yes After Reference Stored No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Scene File No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No Yes No No OHB File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Lens File No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Standard No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Lens File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File Level Auto No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File No Change No Change To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Ref. File To Lens File To Ref. File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To OHB File To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File No Change No Change No Change To Ref. File No Change To Ref. File
Installation mode only Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Display is set to 0 within OHB file is stored Gain is stored to Lens File.

Matrix

R-G/G-B/B-R R-B/G-R/B-G Matrix Off Preset Matrix User Matrix

Auto Iris

Level APL Gain Pattern Select

Black Shading

R.G.B H Saw R.G.B V Saw R.G.B H Para R.G.B V Para

White Shading

R.G.B H Saw R.G.B V Saw R.G.B H Para R.G.B V Para R.G.B 3D Shading

OHB Multi Matrix Hue Saturation Matrix Off OHB Matrix On Test 2Mode White Setup Mode OHB Matrix Correct Auto White Shading Mode V Detail Creation Mode 16:9/4:3 Crop V detail Control Mode

Table 8-2 Function and File table for BVP-950/950P

53

9
Call RET select Cursor on Cursor H-Posi Cursor V-Posi Cursor width Cursor height

Function Comparison Chart


BVP-900/P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (Internal) No Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) Yes (when used with RM-B150 or RCP) BVP-950/P + CA-570/P Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (VF) Yes (Menu) Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes (Menu) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

VF monitor select

Cursor memory Filter local ND filter select CC filter select Safety zone on Center marker on Up tally on Mix VF on Display P in P on/position Incom mic on Incom ENG/PROD Power Zebra (STAND ALONE FUNCTION) Gain select Bars on Auto knee on White select Auto WHT Auto BLK Shutter on Shutter SEL

8 9

Table 9-1 A comparison between the BVP-900/P and BVP-950/P+CA-570/P

54

9
VF Power ON/OFF

Function Comparison Chart


Item MSU-700 Direct Button Menu Panel CAM PW
VF PW TEST1/TEST2/BARS STANDARD PICTURE MONITOR WAVEFORM MONITOR FILTER CTRL/ND/CC 5600K AUTO IRIS CLOSE MASTER GAIN AUTO SETUP/BLACK AUTO SETUP/LEVEL MASTER BLACK AUTO SETUP/WHITE DETAIL OFF LVL DEP OFF KNEE APERTURE SKIN DETAIL DETAIL GATE SKIN DTL AUTO HUE MATRIX OFF ABB or Auto Black Black AUTO Level Black AWB or Auto White White Master/Slave Black Set Auto B. Shading Black Shading Auto W. Shading White Shading V Mod Saw Off V Mod Saw Flare Off Flare/RGB Detail Off Level Limiter Crispening H/V Ratio Frequency Mix Ratio Detail Comb W.Limiter B.Limiter Level Dep Off Level Dep Knee Aperture Knee Apert Skin Detail Level Phase Width Saturation Detail Gate Auto Hue Matrix Off Preset Matrix User Matrix LEVEL APL Ratio Iris Gain

RCP-740/741
CAM PW VF PW TEST1/TEST2/BARS STANDARD MONITOR SELECT FILTER CTRL/ND/CC 5600K AUTO IRIS CLOSE MASTER GAIN AUTO SETUP/BLACK BLACK AUTO SETUP/LEVEL MASTER BLACK AUTO SETUP/WHITE WHITE MASTER/SLAVE R/G/B FLARE DTL LEVEL DTL LIMITER DTL CRISP BLK LIMITER SKIN DEATIL SKIN DETAIL SKIN PHASE SKIN WIDTH SKIN SAT DETAIL GATE

RCP-730/731
CAM PW TEST/BARS STANDARD MONITOR SELECT ND/CC 5600K AUTO IRIS CLOSE MASTER GAIN AUTO SETUP/BLACK BLACK AUTO SETUP/LEVEL MASTER BLACK AUTO SETUP/WHITE WHITE MASTER/SLAVE FLARE DTL OFF DETAIL DETAIL SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL 1 SKIN DETAIL 2 SKIN DETAIL 2 SKIN DEATIL 2 DETAIL GATE

RCP-720/721 R
CAM PW TEST1/BARS STANDARD ND/CC 5600K AUTO IRIS CLOSE MASTER GAIN AUTO SETUP/BLACK BLACK AUTO SETUP/LEVEL MASTER BLACK AUTO SETUP/WHITE WHITE MASTER/SLAVE FLARE DETAIL SKIN DEATIL SKIN DEATIL DETAIL GATE

File Save S O L

Camera Power ON/OFF


Test Signal Output Select Recall Standard Setup Monitor Signal Select (PIX1/WF1 OUTPUT) Monitor Signal Select (PIX2 OUTPUT) Monitor Signal Select (WF2 OUTPUT) ND/CC Filter Select *a, *b 5600K ON/OFF Auto IRIS Adjustment *c Manual Iris Adjustment *c Close Auto Iris Level Adjustment Auto Iris AP ratio Adjustment Auto Iris Gain Adjustment Auto Iris Pattern Select Master Gain Select *b Auto Black Balance Adjustment *b, *c Black Balance Adjustment *c Auto Level Adjustment Master Black Adjustment Auto White Balance Adjustment *b, *c White Balance Adjustment *c Master/Slave Setting Black Set Adjustment Auto Black Shading Adjustment Black Shading Adjustment Auto White Shading Adjustment White Shading Adjustment V Modulation ON/OFF V Modulation Adjustment Flare ON/OFF Flare Balance Adjustment Detail ON/OFF Detail Level Adjustment Detail Limiter Adjustment Detail Crispening Adjustment Detail H/V ratio Asjustment Detail Boost Frequency Adjustment Detail Mix Ratio Adjustment Detail Comb Adjustment White Limiter Adjustment Black Limiter Adjustment Level Dependence ON/OFF Level dependence Adjustment Knee Aperture ON/OFF Knee Aperture Adjustment Skin Detail ON/OFF Skin Detail Level Adjustment Skin Detail Phase Adjustment Skin Detail Width Adjustment Skin Detail Saturation Adjustment Skin Detail Gate ON/OFF Skin Detail Auto Hue Adjustment Matrix ON/OFF Preset Matrix ON/OFF User Matrix ON/OFF

O O O

O O O O O
v

O O

O O O O O O

O O O

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

SKIN DETAIL AUTO HUE SKIN DEATIL AUTO HUE SKIN DETAIL AUTO HUE

O O O O O O

Table 9-2 A comparison between the MSU-700 and RCP-700 Series

55

Function Comparison Chart

Item
Matrix Coefficient Setting Gamma ON/OFF Step Gamma Setting Gamma Balance Adjustment Master Gamma Adjustment Black Gamma ON/OFF Black Gamma RGB Adjustment Master Black Gamma Adjustment Auto Knee ON/OFF Knee ON/OFF Knee Point RGB Adjustment Master Knee Point Adjustment Knee Slope (RGB) Adjustment Master Knee Slope Adjustment Knee MAX ON/OFF Knee Saturation ON/OFF Knee Saturation Adjustment White Clip ON/OFF White Clip Adjustment Shutter/ECS ON/OFF *a ECS/Shutter Mode Select Shutter Speed Selection ECS Frequency Selection Super EVS ON/OFF, Adjustment Color Corrector ON/OFF *d Color Corrector Adjustment *d EDTV (Y3/S1) ON/OFF *d EDTV (Y3/S1) Adjustment *d Comb Filter ON/OFF *d Comb Filter Adjustment *d Contrast ON/OFF Contrast Adjustment Saturation ON/OFF Chroma ON/OFF Mono Color ON/OFF Mono Color Adjustment Reference File Register *a, *b Reference File Transfer Scene File Register/Recall Scene File Transfer Preview Signal Output Call Signal Output *a, *b, *c Character (CCU) Output Character (CNU) Output

MSU-700 Direct Button Menu Panel


GAMMA OFF GAMMA BLACK GAMMA AUTO KNEE KNEE OFF KNEE SAT ON ECS R-G/G-B/B-R R-B/G-R/B-G Gamma Off Gamma (0.4, 0.45, 0.5) Gamma (RGB) Gamma (Master) Black Gamma Black Gamma/RGB Black Gamma/Master Auto Knee Knee Off Knee Point/RGB Knee Point/Master Knee Slope/RGB Knee Slope/Master Knee Max Knee Sat Knee Saturation/Level White Clip Off White Clip ECS/Shutter ECS/Shutter ECS S-EVS Color Correct A/B/C/D/E/F Phase/Width Hue/Saturation EDTV Y3/S1 EDTV Y3/S1 Comb Comb Filter Level Contrast Contrast Saturation Mono Color Saturation/Hue Reference File Ref. Transfer Scene Transfer Character

RCP-740/741
GAMMA R/B GAMMA M Gamma BLACK GAMMA BLK GAMMA AUTO KNEE KNEE POINT KNEE SLOPE ON ECS

RCP-730/731
GAMMA OFF R/B GAMMA M Gamma BLACK GAMMA BLK GAMMA AUTO KNEE KNEE OFF KNEE POINT KNEE SLOPE WHT CLIP ON ECS

RCP-720/721
R/B GAMMA M Gamma BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA AUTO KNEE KNEE POINT KNEE SLOPE KNEE SAT ON ECS

File Save R S O O O O O O v O v O O O O O O O O O O O v O v O v O v O

v /w v /w
COLOR CORRECT CONTRAST SATURATION CHROMA OFF MONO COLOR SCENE FILES CALL CHARACTER

v /w v /w
CONTRAST CONTRAST SATURATION SCENE FILES PREVIEW *e CALL CHARACTER

v /w v /w
SATURATION SCENE FILES PREVIEW *e CALL CHARACTER

v /w v /w
SATURATION SCENE FILES PREVIEW *e CALL CHARACTER

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O O O O O O

*a: Local control enabled with BVP-900/900P *b: Local control enabled with BVP-950/950P *c: Control enabled from RCP-700/701 *d: CCU-700A/700AP requires BKP-7931 for this functionality *e: Use IRIS control lever when control from RCP- XX0 Series

56

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(a) BVP-900/900P
Side Panel

1 Up tally lamp

2 Safety catch 3 Camera number plate 4 Side-panel lock screws

5 Lens lock and knob


Power HAD 1000
CH-1 AUDIO IN 1 2 CH-2 PROMPTER TEST OUT TRACKER RET SCRIPT REMOTE CONTROL

6 Cable clamp 7 AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors 8 AUDIO IN selector 9 Microphone power switches 10 PROMPTER connector 11 TEST OUT connector

16 Accessory bracket

15 REMOTE connector 14 SCRIPT connector 13 RET CONTROL connector 12 TRACKER connector 1 Up tally lamp

2 Safety lock 3 Safety lock 4 Side-panel lock screws

5 Lens lock and knob


AC OUT

16 Accessory bracket
200VAMAX

6 Cable clamp

18 CCU connector 17 AC OUT connector BKP-7910 Stand-Alone Kit *1


REF IN VBS VTR AC OUT
11 5V.18V

DC IN

AC OUT

19 REF IN connector 20 VBS connector 21 VTR connector 17 AC OUT connector 22 DC IN connector

BVP-900P BKP-7910P Stand-Alone Kit *1


REF IN VBS

18 CCU connector 17 AC OUT connector


VTR AC OUT
11 5V.18V

DC IN

200VAMAX

19 REF IN connector 20 VBS connector

22 DC IN connector 17 AC OUT connector 21 VTR connector

57

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) Up tally lamp Illuminates when the camera receives a red tally signal. When the CALL button on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, and with the CCU CALL switch on the internal MS board set to ON, the lamp illuminates if not already lit, and is turned off if it was illuminated. The brightness of the lamp is adjustable by a control on the internal MS board. To stop the lamp illuminating, set the UP TALLY switch on the rear panel to OFF. Attach one of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) to show the camera number. For details on adjusting the lamp brightness and attaching the number plate, refer to the system manual. 2) Safety catch Safety catch to prevent the side panel from accidentally opening. To open the side panel, loosen the side-panel lock screw, slide the safety catch toward the lens, and open the panel. The side panel automatically locks as it is closed. For details, refer to the system manual. 3) Camera number plate Attach the supplied light gray number plate to show the camera number. For details how to attach a number plate, refer to the system manual. 4) Side-panel lock screw Locks the side panel to prevent it from accidentally opening. Turn it fully clockwise. 5) Lens lock and knob Locks the lens. To attach or detach the lens, turn the knob fully counterclockwise until the lever is horizontal. To lock the lens, turn the knob clockwise until the lever is vertical. 6) Cable clamp Retains the triax camera cable, accepting cables from 8 to 15 mm in diameter. For details on how to use the cable clamp, refer to the system manual. 7) AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 (audio input channels 1 and 2) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Accept microphone or line level signals. 8) AUDIO IN (audio input select) selectors Set to the appropriate positions for the equipment connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors. MIC: When a microphones is connected. LINE: When a line-level signal source is connected. 9) Microphone power switches Control power fed to microphones connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors. +48 V: When the connected microphone requires an external power source, a +48 V supply is fed to the microphone. OFF: When the connected microphone does not require external power. 10) PROMPTER (teleprompter) connector (BNC type) The signal input to the PROMPTER INPUT connector on a CCU700A/700AP is output from this connector to feed a teleprompter monitor. 11) TEST OUT (test signal output) connector (BNC type) Outputs the signal selected with the video signal select buttons on the rear panel, when the TEST OUT switch on the MS board is set to VF. When the TEST OUT switch is set to RET, the return video signal is output. (The return video signal selected last is output.) When a BKP-7910/7910P Stand-alone Kit is installed in the camera, a

composite video signal is output if the TEST OUT switch is set to VBS. 12) TRACKER connector (10-pin) Used for communication between the camera operator and tracker and for intercom 1 and 2 connection. It also supplies the up tally and program audio signals. 13) RET CONTROL (return video control) connector (6-pin) Used for selecting the return video signal, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and for turning the intercom microphone on or off from external equipment such as a selector unit on the camera pan bar. 14) SCRIPT (script light) connector (4-pin) Supplies power (12 V/5 W maximum) for the script light. 15) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Interface for an optional Master Set-up Unit or Remote Control Unit/Panel, via a CCA cable. 16) Accessory bracket Used to attach an optional accessory, such as a BKP-7911/7912 Script Holder or a lens focus/zoom demand control. To attach an accessory, refer to the its instruction manual. 17) AC OUT (AC power output) connector Supplies AC power (200 VA maximum). 18) CCU (camera control unit) connector (triax connector) Interface for the triax cable connecting the camera to the Camera Control Unit. All the signals to and from a BVP-900 Series camera and its CCU (power, control, video and audio) are carried by this single triax cable. 19) REF IN (reference signal input) connector (BNC type) *1 Accepts a VBS or black burst signal to genlock the camera when it is operating in stand-alone mode. 20) VBS (video signal output) connector (BNC type) *1 Supplies composite video signals when the BVP-900/900P is operating in stand-alone mode. 21 )VTR connector (26-pin) *1 Connection for a VTR, via a CCZ or CCZQ cable, when the camera is operating in stand-alone mode. 22) DC IN (DC power input) connector (4-pin) *1 Power connection for an external DC power source (11.5 V to 18 V) when using a BVP-900/900P as a stand-alone camera.
*1. These connectors are part of the BKP-7910/7910P Stand-alone Kit.

10

58

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Rear Panel The functions of the switches and controls numbered 1) through 30) are the same for both the BVP-900 and BVP-900P. The switches and controls numbered 31) through 36) are for the BVP-900, and those Rear Panel of the BVP-900/900P numbered 37) through 42) are for the BVP-900P. For details of switches and controls numbered 37) through 42) for the BVP-900P, see Rear panel of the BVP-900P.

3 H-POSI control 4 V-POSI control 2 Video signal select buttons 1 POWER indicator
R G B RET

5 WIDTH control 6 HEIGHT control 7 RET button


RET 1

POWER

8 RET 1 button

28 FILTER LOCAL button 27 ND filter control

FILTER LOCAL

2 3 4 0 5

H-POSI 0

V-POSI 0

RETURN SELECT 2 3 4

1
3
PinP POSITION ON OFF CALL

9 RETURN SELECT knob 10 Rear tally lamp 11 CURSOR STORE button 12 CURSOR ON button 13 CURSOR 1, 2, and 3 buttons 14 CALL button

B C D 0 E

WIDTH 0

HEIGHT 0

STORE

CURSOR 1 2

26 Spare switch 25 CC filter contorol

CENTER SAFETY MARKER ZONE UP TALLY MIX VF DISPLAY MENU SELECT ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

VF DETA
ON 0 OFF

24 CENTER MARKER switch 23 SAFETY ZONE switch 22 UP TALLY switch 21 MIX VF switch 20 DISPLAY switch

15 PinP switch 16 VF DETAIL control 17 VF DETAIL switch 18 MENU SELECT knob 19 MENU SELECT switch

29 VF connector

30 Memo clip

MIC
ENG PROD OFF ON ENG PROD REVERSE INTERCOM PGM REVERSE INTERCOM

MIC
OFF ON

PGM

INTERCOM 1

INTERCOM 2

31 MIC ON/OFF Switch 32 INTERCOM PROD/ENG Switch


MIC
ENG PROD OFF ON ENG PROD

32 INTERCOM PROD/ENG switch 31 MIC ON/OFF switch


MIC
OFF ON REVERSE INTERCOM PGM 0 0 REVERSE INTERCOM PGM 0 0

33 INTERCOM 1 connector
INTERCOM 1

33 INTERCOM 2 connector
INTERCOM 2

34 INTERCOM control 35 REVERSE switch 36 PGM control

36 PGM control 35 REVERSE switch 34 INTERCOM control

59

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) POWER indicator Illuminates as follows to show the power supply status. Green: Power is supplied to the BVP-900/900P. Red: The CAMERA POWER switch of the CCU-700A/700AP is set to the off position, or the CAM PW button of the MSU700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel unit is set to off. Yellow: Power is supplied to the BVP-900/900P, however the VF PW button of the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is set to off and power is not supplied to the viewfinder. Not illuminated: Power is not supplied to the camera. 2) Video signal select button Selects the video signals (R, G and B) displayed on the viewfinder. The TEST OUT connector can output the same signals as those displayed on the viewfinder. * When an R, G or B button is pressed the corresponding signal is displayed. When two buttons are pressed simultaneously, the corresponding signals are mixed and then displayed. * When all three R, G and B buttons are pressed at the same time, a Y signal is displayed on the viewfinder. * When none of the buttons are pressed, the following signals are output:: When a black-and-white viewfinder is used: A Y signal is output to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector. When a color viewfinder is used: The R, G and B signals are output to the viewfinder, and a color picture appears on the viewfinder. The TEST OUT connector outputs a Y signal. 3) H-POSI (horizontal position) control Adjusts the horizontal position of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. 4) V-POSI (vertical position) control Adjusts the vertical position of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. 5) WIDTH control Adjusts the width of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen within the safety zone. See description of the SAFETY ZONE switch. 6) HEIGHT control Adjusts the height of the box cursor on the viewfinder screen within the safety zone. See description of the SAFETY ZONE switch. 7) RET 2 (return video) button Press this button when another return video source is used. The return video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT knob is displayed on the viewfinder. When the TEST OUT switch on the MS board is set to VF, the TEST OUT connector also outputs the selected return video signal. Press this button again and the camera signal is output to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector. 8) RET 1(return video 1) button * Press to monitor the return video 1 signal on the viewfinder. When the TEST OUT switch on the MS board is set to VF, the TEST OUT connector also outputs the return video 1 signal. Press this button again and the camera signal is output to the viewfinder and the TEST OUT connector. * When using the BVP-900/900P as a stand-alone camera with a VTR, the playback signal of the VTR is output.
Notes * The RET 1 button has priority over the RET button if both buttons are

pressed. (The TEST OUT switch setting has no effect on this priority.) * When the TEST OUT switch is set to RET, the TEST OUT connector outputs the return video signal, regardless of the setting of the video signal select button.

9) RETURN SELECT knob Selects the return video signal displayed on the viewfinder screen when the RET button is depressed. 10) Rear tally lamp Lights when a red tally signal is received. When the CALL button on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, the lamp is illuminated if not already lit or turned off if it was already illuminated. The brightness of this tally lamp is adjustable with a control on the internal AT board. Attach one of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) to show the camera number. For details on adjusting the brightness and attaching a number plate, refer to the system manual. 11) CURSOR STORE button Press to store the size and position of the box cursor.
Note If the CURSOR button is not illuminated, the data cannot be stored.

12) CURSOR ON button Press and illuminate this button to display the box cursor on the viewfinder screen. Press this button again, the button illumination is turned off and the box cursor disappears. 13) CURSOR (cursor memory) 1, 2 and 3 buttons Press one of these buttons with the CURSOR STORE button blinking, and the size and position of the box cursor displayed on the viewfinder screen is stored. Three different box cursor settings can be stored using these buttons. You can recall the stored size and position of the box cursor by simply pressing the corresponding button.
Note Once any one of the three cursor buttons is illuminated, the H-POSI, V-POSI, WIDTH and HEIGHT controls are disabled.

10

14) CALL button * Press to call the operator of a CCU-700A/700AP, MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel. The call button of the RCP-700 Series panel and on the MSU-700 is illuminated and a buzzer sounds. The camera CALL button is illuminated when the CALL button on the RCP-700 Series panel or the MSU-700 is pressed. * When using the BVP-900/900P as a stand-alone camera, this button functions as the start/stop button for the VTR. 15) P in P (Picture-in-Picture) switch Used to display a small picture in a corner of the main viewfinder picture. POSITION: The position of the sub image moves to a different corner each time you move the switch from ON to this position. ON: Enters the P in P mode. When neither the RET 1 nor the RET 2 button is depressed, the camera signal is displayed as the main viewfinder image, while the last selected return video signal is displayed as the sub image. Press either the RET 1 or RET 2 button to exchange the pictures on the viewfinder screen and the small picture. OFF: The sub image does not appear.
Note You can setup the monitoring of the small picture only when you push the return button of the camera. For the details, refer to the system manual.

60

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


16) VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail) control Adjusts the amount of detail in the viewfinder picture when the VF DETAIL switch is set to ON. This has no effect on the camera output signal.
Note The viewfinder detail control function has no effect on a return video signal and the Picture-in-Picture function.

17) VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail adjustment) switch ON: Emphasizes the amount of detail in the viewfinder picture. With the switch set to this position, you can adjust the amount of detail using the VF DETAIL control. OFF: Disables detail emphasis. 18) MENU SELECT knob Controls menu item selection and value setting on the viewfinder screen. For menu operation, refer to the system manual. 19) MENU SELECT switch ENTER: Activates the selection made by the MENU SELECT knob. CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MENU SELECT knob and restores the previously selected menu item. For menu operation, refer to the system manual. 20) DISPLAY switch Used to display the status of the switch settings, automatic adjustment items and results on the viewfinder screen. ON: The display function is enabled. OFF: The display function is disabled. MENU: A menu for setting the displayed items and functions appears. For menu operation, refer to the system manual. 21) MIX VF (mix viewfinder) switch Selects the picture in the viewfinder when the RET 1 or RET button is pressed. ON: When the RET 1 or RET button is depressed, a mixed picture of the camera output signal and the return video signal (return video 1 or the return video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT control) is displayed on the viewfinder screen. The mixing ratio is adjustable with the control on the internal board of the CCU-700A/700AP. For details, refer to the system manual. OFF: Only the return video 1, or the return video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT control, can be monitored when the RET 1 or RET 2 button is pressed. 22) UP TALLY switch Selects whether the external tally lamp, up tally lamp or front tally lamp on the viewfinder are illuminated when a red tally signal is supplied to the camera system. ON: The tally lamps illuminate. OFF: The tally lamps do not illuminate. The brightness of the up tally lamps on the BVP-900/900P and on the viewfinder is adjustable. For details, refer to the system manual. 23) SAFETY ZONE switch ON: A box (safety zone) indicating 90% of the picture area appears on the viewfinder screen. OFF: A safety zone box does not appear on the viewfinder screen. The size of the safety zone can be changed to 80% by a switch on the BVP-900/900P. For details, refer to the system manual.

24) CENTER MARKER switch ON: A white cross (center marker) appears on the viewfinder screen to indicate its center. OFF: The center marker does not appear on the viewfinder screen. You can adjust the position of the center marker so that it matches the center of the lens in use. This adjusted position can be stored in a lens file. For details, refer to the system manual. 25) CC (color temperature conversion) filter control Selects a filter suitable for the lighting conditions when the FILTER LOCAL button is illuminated.
Position A B C D E Filter Cross filter 3200 K (Clear) 4300 K 6300 K 8000 K

26) Spare switch 27) ND filter control Selects the ND filter when the FILTER LOCAL button is illuminated.
Position 1 2 3 4 5 Filter Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND

28) FLITER LOCAL (filter local control) button Press and illuminate this button to enable switching of the CC and ND filters using the CC and ND filter controls. Press this button again so that it is not illuminated to return filter control to the master set-up unit or the remote control panel. 29) VF (viewfinder) connector (D-sub 25-pin) Interface connector for the camera viewfinder. 30) Memo clip Rear Panel of the BVP-900 only 31) MIC (intercom microphone) ON/OFF switch Turns the headset microphone on or off. 32) INTERCOM PROD/ENG (intercom producer/engineer line) switch Selects the destination of the intercom 1 or 2 signals between the producer line and engineer line. PROD: Goes to the producers line. ENG: Goes to the engineers line. 33) INTERCOM 1 and INTERCOM 2 connectors (XLR 5-pin) * Connect an XLR 5-pin-type headset. The INTERCOM 1 connector can be used for communication even if the power to the camera is turned OFF on the CCU-700A/700AP. You can use the INTERCOM 2 connector for an RTS intercom system by installing an optional BKP-7913 RTS Intercom System Kit, and two RTS Belt-pack can be connected. * You can monitor playback audio from the VTRs when using the BVP-900/900P as a stand-alone unit. 34) INTERCOM (intercom volume) control Adjusts the output level of the intercom. 35) REVERSE switch Reverse the left and right channels of the intercom signals.

61

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

36)PGM (program audio level) control * Adjusts the output level of the program audio. * This control adjusts the level of the playback audio signal of the VTR when the BVP-900/900P is used as a stand-alone camera. Rear Panel of the BVP-900P For details on the functions of the switches and controls numbered 1) through 30), see Rear panel of the BVP-900.

MIC TRACKER ENG PROD PGM

INTERCOM 1

INTERCOM 2

37 INTERCOM connector 38 TRACKER control 39 ENG control

37 INTERCOM connector 42 PGM control 41 PROD control 40 MIC switch

10

37) INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin) * Connection for a headset with an XLR 5-pin connector. The left INTERCOM connector can be used for communication even if the power to the camera is turned OFF on the CCU-700P. You can use the right INTERCOM connector for an RTS intercom system by installing an optional BKP-7913 RTS Intercom System Kit. Two RTS belt packs can be connected. * Playback audio from a VTRs can be monitored via this connector when using a BVP-900P as a stand-alone camera. 38) TRACKER control Adjusts the level of the intercom with the tracker. 39) ENG (engineer line) control Adjusts the level of the intercom with the engineer. 40) MIC (microphone line select) switch Selects the line to which the headset microphone is connected. ENG: connected to the engineers line. OFF: microphone switched off. PROD: connected to the producers line. 41) PROD (producer) control Adjusts the intercom level of the producers line. 42) PGM (program audio level) control * Adjusts the level of the program audio fed to the headset. * This control adjusts the level of the playback audio from a VTR when the BVP-900P is used as a stand-alone camera.

62

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(b) BVP-950/950P
Side Panels
11 TALLY lamp and switch

1 FILTER LOCAL button 2 ND filter button 3 CC filter button

4 WHITE switch 5 OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE switch 6 GAIN switch 7 VTR switch


VTR
L M H OFF

12 INCOM button 13 RET 1 button


RET1 RET2 INCOM

GAIN

OUTPUT

AUTO KNEE

WHITE

14 RET 2 button

DISPLAY
ENTER ON OFF CANCEL MENU

TESTOUT

8 ENTER/CANCEL switch 9 DISPLAY switch 10 TEST OUT switch 15 VF connector

Power HAD

1000

16 LOCK screw
LOCK TEST OUT REMOTE RET 1

MIC 1

20 Shoulder pad

17 RET 1 button 18 REMOTE connector 19 TEST OUT connector

1) FILTER LOCAL (filter local control) button Pressing the CC or ND filter button while pressing this button enables switching of the CC and ND filters. 2 )ND filter button Used to select the desired ND filter when the FILTER LOCAL button is pressed at the same time.
Filter No. 1 2 3 4 5 Filter Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND

3) CC (color temperature conversion) filter button Used to select the appropriate CC filter for the lighting conditions when the FILTER LOCAL button is pressed at the same time.
Filter No. A B C D E Filter Cross filter 3200 K (Clear) 4300 K 6300 K 8000 K

4) WHITE (white balance memory select) switch Selects the white balance adjustment method and memory to store the adjusted value.

63

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

PRESET: White balance is automatically adjusted to the preset value for the color temperature of 3200K. A or B: Memory A or B is selected. 5) OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE (output signal select/auto knee) switch Selects an output signal supplied to a VTR, viewfinder and video monitor (color bar signals or camera picture). When the camera picture is selected, the auto knee function can be activated. BARS/OFF: Color bar signals are output, and the auto-knee circuit does not function. CAM/OFF: The camera picture is output, but the auto-knee circuit does not function. CAM/ON: The camera picture is output, and the auto-knee circuit functions. 6) GAIN switch Selects the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the shot. The values for positions low, medium and high are set with the Set-up Menu on the viewfinder screen. For details, refer to the system manual. 7) VTR switch Selects the control signal to a VTR connected to the camera via an optional CA-553/553P Camera Adaptor. Depending on the switch setting, the VTR starts recording as follows: SAVE: Power-save position. Recording starts a few seconds after the VTR START button is pressed. A new recording may not smoothly join to the previous recording. STBY (standby): Recording starts immediately the VTR START button is pressed.
Note The WHITE 4), OUTPUT/AUTO KNEE 5), GAIN 6) and VTR 7) switches do not function when the camera is connected to a camera control unit.

8) ENTER/CANCEL switch Functions when the DISPLAY switch is set to MENU (Menu mode). ENTER: Activates the selection made by the MIC 1 LEVEL control. CANCEL: Cancels the selection made by the MIC 1 LEVEL control and restores the previously selected menu item. For menu operation, refer to the system manual. 9) DISPLAY switch Used for displaying camera status such as switch settings, camera and viewfinder configurations and the results of automatic adjustments on the viewfinder screen. ON: The camera display function is activated. The items shown can be programmed using the menu. OFF: The display function is not activated. MENU: A screen for setting the displayed items and programming camera set-up appears. The MIC 1 LEVEL control on the front panel functions as the menu item selector. For menu operation, refer to the system manual. 10) TEST OUT (output) selector Selects the output signal from the TEST OUT connector. ENC: An encoded signal is output. RGB: Either an R, G or B signal is output. SEL: Each time you press down the selector switch from the RGB position to the SEL position, the output signal from the TEST OUT connector cyclically changes between R, G

and B. 11) TALLY (rear tally) lamp and switch With the switch set to ON, when a red or green tally signal is supplied, the lamp illuminates in the corresponding color. When the CALL button on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed the lamp is illuminated if not already lit or turned off if it was already illuminated. When a VTR is connected to the camera using a camera adaptor, the lamp illuminates in red when a record tally signal is supplied from the VTR. To prevent the lamp illuminating even when a tally signal is supplied, set the switch to OFF. 12) INCOM (intercom) button The intercom 1 microphone is turned on while this button is pressed. 13) RET 1 (return video 1) button The return video 1 signal from the Camera Control Unit (CCU) is displayed on the viewfinder screen while this button is pressed. It has the same function as the other RET 1 button, see17). 14) RET 2 (return video 2) button When return video 2 is in use, press this button to display the return video 2 signal on the viewfinder screen. 15) VF (viewfinder ) connector (20-pin) Connector for the 20-pin cable to the camera viewfinder. To use the BVF-55/55CE Viewfinder, connect the cable supplied with the viewfinder. 16) LOCK screw Locks the attached camera adaptor. 17) RET 1 (return video 1) button The return video 1 signal from the Camera Control Unit (CCU) is displayed on the viewfinder screen while this button is pressed. It has the same function as the other RET 1 button, see 13). 18) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connector for an optional RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel or RM-B150 Remote Control Unit, using a CCA cable. The camera can be controlled from either one of these units. A video monitoring signal is provided from the RM-B150, using the exclusive cable supplied with this unit 19) TEST OUT connector (BNC type) Supplies the signal selected with the TEST OUT selector. 20) Shoulder pad A chest pad is provided. Pull out for use.

10

Chest pad

64

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Front Panel 5) SHUTTER switch OFF: The electronic shutter does not function. ON: The electronic shutter is activated. SEL: The shutter speed and shutter mode change each time the switch is moved to this position. For details, refer to the system manual. 6) AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white balance/black balance adjustment) switch Automatically adjusts the white balance and black balance. WHT: The white balance is automatically adjusted. When the WHITE switch on the side of the camera is set to A or B, the adjusted value is stored in memory A or B. BLK: The black balance is automatically adjusted. Black set is simultaneously adjusted.
Note The SHUTTER 5) and AUTO W/B BAL 6) switches do not function when the camera is connected to a camera control unit (CCU).

7 MIC 1 LEVEL control 6 AUTO W/B BAL switch 5 SHUTTER switch 4 VTR START button 3 LENS connector 2 Microphone power switch 1 MIC 1 connector

7) MIC 1 LEVEL (microphone 1 level) control When a VTR is connected using an optional camera adaptor, the microphone 1 audio level is adjusted by turning this control. When the CA-570/570P Camera Adaptor is used and the LEVEL/MIC switch on the of the camera adaptor rear panel is set to FRONT/OFF, the sound volume of the intercom is adjusted with this control. You can also turn the intercom 1 microphone on/off by pressing this control. When the DISPLAY switch on the side panel of the camera is set to MENU, turn this control to select a menu item and press it to register the selection. For menu operations, refer to the system manual.

1) MIC 1 (microphone channel 1) connector Accepts the signal from an external microphone. Normally, this is used to connect the microphone supplied with the optional BVF10/10CE, BVF-C10W or BVF-20W/20WCE Viewfinder. 2) Microphone power switch Controls power fed to the microphone connected to the MIC-1 connector. +48 V: When the microphone supplied with the optional BVF10/10CE, BVF-C10W or BVF-20W/20WCE Viewfinder is connected. Also use with any other type of microphone requiring an external +48 V power source. OFF: When the connected microphone does not require external power. 3) Lens connector (12-pin) Connector for the lens remote control cable. 4) VTR START button When a camera control unit is connected using an optional camera adaptor, the intercom 1 audio signal is normally sent to the CCU while this button remains pressed. However, this function can be changed via the Set-up Menu displayed on the viewfinder screen. This provides a choice of sending either the intercom 1 or the intercom 2 audio signal, or the return video 2 signal to the CCU while this button remains pressed. With a VTR connected using a CA-553/553P Camera Adaptor, pressing this button alternately starts and stops the VTR recording. This is the same function as that of the VTR button on the lens. For details, refer to the system manual.
65

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(c) CA-570/570P
Rear Panel and Side Panels
1 19

RET1 button/RET button and RET 2/3/4 switch


2

PGM level control


20

TALLY lamp and TALLY switch

ENG level control

PGM level controls

21

MIC LINE switch

INCOM level controls, PROD/ENG switches, and LEVEL/MIC switches Triax connector

5 22 23 24

PROD level control


6

TRACKER level control INCOM 1/2 connector VTR connector REMOTE connector

LEVEL/MIC switch

7 15

EARPHONE jack
8

14

TRACKER connector RET CONT connector TEST OUT connector


10 9

10
DC IN connector

13

12

PROMPTER/GEN LOCK connector

11

AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 connectors and LINE/MIC switch and extemal power supply mode switch for the microphone

16

CALL button

17

POWER switch and indicator


18

DC OUT connector

66

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


1) RET 1 (return video 1) button/RET (return video) button and RET 2/3/4 switch RET 1 (return video 1) button Press this button to monitor the return video 1 signal from the CCU in the viewfinder or on a monitor using the TEST OUT signal. RET (return video) button Press this button to monitor the return video signal from the CCU in the viewfinder. Select the signal to be monitored with the RET 2/3/4 switch. RET 2/3/4 switch Selects the return video signal monitored in the viewfinder while the RET button is pressed. 2) TALLY lamp and TALLY switch When the TALLY switch is ON, the TALLY lamp illuminates when a red tally signal or call signal is input from the CCU. Turning S200-1 on the AU-251 board to ON makes the battery alarm signal flash the TALLY lamp. 3) PGM (program) level controls (CA-570 only) Adjusts the audio volume of the program. 4) INCOM (intercom) level controls, PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) switches, and LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switches (CA-570 only. See 19) through 24) for CA-570P) INCOM (intercom) level controls Adjusts the audio volume of the intercom PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) switches Switches the intercom microphone. PROD: Selects the microphone to the producers line. ENG: Selects the microphone to the engineers line. LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switch The LEVEL and MIC switch settings control the following functions: REAR/ON: Turns on the intercom microphone. The intercom reception level is controlled from the rear panel INCOM control. REAR/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on external equipment (such as a pan bar control) connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception level with the INCOM control. FRONT/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on external equipment (such as a pan bar control) connected to the RET CONT connector. The intercom reception level is controlled from the rear panel INCOM control.
Note INCOM level controls, LEVEL/MIC switches and PROD/ENG switches are provided for both intercom1 and 2.

INCOM 1 connector can be used for communications even when power to the camera is turned off on the CCU. 7) VTR connector (26-pin) Inputs and outputs video signals, audio signals, control signals and the power supply. Connects to the CAMERA connector on a VTR or AC adaptor.
Note The VTR connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected.

8) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connects to an RCP-700 Series or RM-B150 Remote Control Unit. The length of the connecting cable must not exceed 150 feet (50 meters).
Note * The REMOTE connector cannot be used when a CCU is connected. * When connecting to a RM-B150, use the cable supplied with this unit.

9) EXT DC IN (DC input) connector (4-pin) Connector for an AC adaptor output or battery case. DC power is supplied to the CA-570/570P via this connector when the POWER switch is set to EXT. 10) PROMPTER/GEN LOCK (prompter signal input and output/external sync signal input) connector (BNC type) Input for an external sync signal, or input/output for a prompter video signal. Select the appropriate function with the PROMPTER/GENLOCK switch on the internal MD-119 board. The connector is factory set for PROMPT. 11) AUDIO IN 1/AUDIO IN 2 (audio input) connectors (XLR 3-pin) and LINE/MIC (line input/microphone) switch Inputs for external audio signals. Set the LINE/MIC switches according to the level of the input signal. The following power supply settings can be specified for the external microphone: : +12 V is supplied to the external microphone (when the S800 switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON). OFF: power is not supplied to the external microphone. +48 V: +48 V is supplied to the external microphone (when the S700 switch on the AU-251 board is set to ON).
Note If you select the signal switch to and the S800 on the AU-251 board to on alternatively, then +12 V is supplied to the +48 V microphone and may cause a damage to the microphone itself.

12) TEST OUT (test video output) connector (BNC type) Outputs return video signals, playback video signals, VBS signal or monitor output signals. Normally outputs return video signals when a CCU is connected and playback video signals when a VTR is connected.
Note Select the output signal with switch S100 on the AU-251 board.

5) Triax connector Connector for a triax cable from a CCU-700A/700AP or CCU550/550P Series Camera Control Unit. 6) INCOM (intercom) 1/2 connectors Connectors for headphones enabling operators to listen to and speak on intercom, and listen to program audio. Set the MIC switch on the AU-237 board to CM when using headphones with a carbon microphone or to DYN when using a dynamic microphone. The
67

13) RET CONT (return control connector (6-pin) Input for the control signals that select the return video 1, 2 or 3, and turn the intercom microphone on and off. 14) TRACKER connector (10-pin) Use for communications with a tracker. Also provides intercom 1 and 2 communications. Outputs the up tally and program audio signals. DC is available from this connector, maximum current 500 mA. 15) EARPHONE jack (mini-jack) Connector for an earphone to monitor audio from the VTR, intercom or program audio. Select the audio source with the switch S1 on the MB-783 board. 16) CALL button Use this button to call the CCU or Master Set-up Unit operator. When this button is pressed, the red tally lamps in the viewfinder

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

and on the CCU and MSU are illuminated. 17) POWER switch Selects the power source. CCU: Power is supplied from the CCU. (Standby): Standby mode. EXT: Power is supplied from the VTR or via the EXT DC IN connector (see 9)). 18) DC OUT (direct current output) connector (4-pin) Outputs 10.5 V to 17 V DC up to a maximum of 500 mA. Connecting equipment with a power consumption greater than this maximum rating will activate the protection circuit, cutting off the current. 19) PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) intercom level controls, PROD/ENG (producer/engineer) switches, and LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switch (CA-570P only. See 4) for CA-570) PGM (program) level control Adjusts the audio volume of the program line. ENG (engineer) level control Adjusts the audio volume of the engineers line. MIC LINE switch Selects the line to which the headset microphone is connected. ENG: connected to the engineers line. OFF: microphone switched off. PROD: connected to the producers line. PROD (producer) level control Adjusts the audio volume of the producer line. TRACKER level control Adjust the audio volume of the tracker line. LEVEL/MIC (intercom level/microphone) switch The LEVEL and MIC switch settings control the following functions: REAR/ON: Turns on the intercom microphone. Adjust the intercom reception level with the PGM, ENG, PROD and TRACKER level controls. REAR/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on the external equipment connected to the RET CONT connector. Adjust the intercom reception level with the PGM, ENG, PROD and TRACKER level controls. FRONT/OFF: Turns off the intercom microphone. Turn the intercom microphone on and off using the control on external equipment (such as a pan bar box) connected to the RET CONT connector. Use the control on the camera to adjust the intercom reception level.

10

68

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Internal Switches CA-570/570P
MD TF AU AU

1
PROMPTER

PROMPTER/GENLOCK switch

INTERCOM GENLOCK

GAIN

INTERCOM

INTERCOM and GAIN switches

Unscrew the four screws.

GAIN

CA-570/570P

Switch onthe MB-783 board

Switch S1

Unscrew the four screw

1) PROMPTER/GENLOCK (prompter signal input and output/external sync signal input) switch (MD-119 board) Selects the PROMPTER/GENLOCK connector function. PROMPTER: Inputs and outputs a prompter signal (factory setting). GENLOCK: Inputs an external sync signal. 2) INTERCOM and GAIN switches (AU-237 board) Set these switches to specify the type of microphone connected to the INCOM 1 and INCOM 2 connectors and their respective levels. INTERCOM 1/2 switches CM: carbon microphone (factory setting) DYN: dynamic microphone GAIN 1/2 switches +: Raises the gain 6 dB above standard gain 0: Standard gain -: Lowers the gain 6 dB below standard gain 3) Switch S1 (MB-783 board) Specifies the type of audio signal output from the EARPHONE jack. * S1-1: Set to ON to output the program audio signal. * S1-2: Set to ON to output the audio signal of intercom 1. * S1-3: Set to ON to output the audio signal of intercom 2. * S1-4: Set to ON to output the VTR playback audio signal.
69

All switches are factory set to OFF, except S1-1.


Switch on the DM-116 board
LV3 RV1 FL4 LV4 RV4 CN3 RV2 E2 TP5 CN4 PL5 C B A

PL3 D CN3

Switch S4

FL2 PL1 LV7 RV1 LV1 F CN2 TP3 G 4 3 2 1 E

4) Switch S4 (DM-116 board) Selects the direction of the prompter signal flow between the CCU and CAM. CCU CAM: The video signal from the CCU is output from the PROMPTER/GENLOCK connector. CAM CCU: The signal input to the PROMPT/GENLOCK connector is output to the CCU.
Note The setting of the CN4, CN5 and the CCU should be same as S4 on the DM-116 board.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

5) S3 switch (AU-237 board) Specifies whether the incom audio output from INCOM 2 connector and the program audio are mixed or not. IND: No mixing (factory setting for CA-570). MIX: MIX mode 2 (set by switch S5) (CA-570 only).
Switch on the AU-237 board
4 E401 A 3 2 1

Switch S3
B S301

6
S1 C 0082 E1 RV302 E301 S203 D TPS01 RV111 RV112 0082 TP111 RV201 CN1

Switch S4 Switch S2, S4, S5

E S203 E301

RV411

6) Switch S4 (AU-237 board) When this switch is set to ON, the program audio is mixed with the intercom audio. The factory setting is OFF. (CA-570 only) 7) Switch S2, S4, and S5 (AU-237 board) These switches assign the mixing of intercom and control signals (CA-570 only). For details, refer to the system manual. 8) Switch S800 (AU-251 board) Turns the power supply (12 V A/B) to the external microphone on and off. Power is not supplied if the MIC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF or to +48 V. The factory setting is OFF.
Switch on the AU-251 board
4 3 2 1 A S990 S800

when a CCU is connected. When set to OFF, power is always supplied to the REMOTE connector. 13) Switch S100 (AU-251 board) Selects the signal output from the TEST OUT connector. * S100-1: Disables automatic switching between the playback video signal and the return video signal. ON: Outputs the playback video signal. OFF: Outputs the return video signal when a CCU is attached; outputs the playback video signal when a VTR is attached. The factory setting is OFF. * S100-2: Specifies output of the VBS signal from the camera or the return/playback video signal. ON: Outputs the VBS signal from the camera. OFF: Outputs the return or playback video signal. The factory setting is OFF. * S100-3: Selects either a VBS video signal output or monitor signal output. ON: Outputs the monitor signal. OFF: Outputs the VBS signal. * S100-4: Selects whether the control signal from the RET CONT connector is received or not. ON: Outputs the return video signal only for an L (ground) return control signal. OFF: Outputs the return video signal only when a CCU is connected. The various combinations of switch S100 settings and their corresponding video output signal are as follows:
A100-1 A100-2 OFF A100-3 A100-4 RET CONT Video output signal Return video (when a CCU is connected) Playback video (when a VTR is connected) ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON L L H OFF ON ON ON L L Playback video Monitor video Return video (when a CCU is connected) Playback video (when a VTR is connected) VBS video Return video (when a CCU is connected) Playback video (when a VTR is connected) OFF

10

9 10

Switch S600 Switch S351

Switch S800

S361 B

CN1 C

S700

11

Switch S700

S200

12
RV203 E S100 RV100

Switch S200

13

Switch S100
F

9) Switch S600 (AU-251 board) Specifies the audio input signal to be from the MIC 1 connector on the camera or the AUDIO IN 1 connector on the CA-570/570P. C: Input from the MIC 1 connector on the camera. CA: Input from the AUDIO IN 1 connector on the CA-570/570P. 10) Switch S351 (AU-251 board) Set to ON to monitor the microphone input on a headset. The factory setting is OFF. 11) Switch S700 (AU-251 board) Turns the power supply (48 V) to the external microphone on and off. 12) Switch S200 (AU-251 board) * S200-1: When S200-1 is set to ON, the battery alarm signals operate the tally lamp. This switch is factory set to OFF. In this position, the indicator in the viewfinder is unaffected * S200-2: Remote Control Panel power save function, controlling power to the remote connector. When ON, power to the remote connector is turned off

70

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(d) CCU-700A/700AP
Front Panel

2 Green tally lamp 1 Red tally lamp

3 MIC switch 4 INTERCOM control


CANERA CONTROL UNIT

CABLE ALARM

MIC

MAIN POWER

CAMERA POWER INTERCOM

8 CABLE ALARM indicator 7 MAIN POWER switch and

5 INTERCOM connector 6 CAMERA POWER switch and indicator

indicator

1) Red tally lamp This lamp is illuminated when the unit receives a red tally signal. When the CALL button on the camera, MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, the lamp is illuminated if it was not lit, or is turned off if it was already illuminated. Attach one of the supplied number plates here. For details on attaching a number plate, refer to the system manual. 2) Green tally lamp Lights when the unit receives a green tally signal. Attach one of the supplied number plates here. For details on attaching a number plate, refer to the system manual. 3) MIC (microphone select) switch Set to the appropriate position according to the type of headset microphone. DYNAMIC: When using a dynamic microphone. OFF: Switches the microphone off. CARBON: When using a carbon microphone. 4) INTERCOM (intercom volume) control Adjusts the receiving level of the intercom. The volume of the sound mixed with program audio is set with the control on the AT board. For details on setting mixed-sound volume, refer to the system manual. The intercom line can be switched with the corresponding switch on the internal AT board. For details, refer to the system manual. 5) INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin) Connector for a headset. When you wish to use a headset with a plug other than XLR 5-pin type, consult an authorized Sony representative. 6) CAMERA POWER switch and indicator This switch controls the power supply to the camera when the MAIN POWER switch is set to the ON position (| position). The indicator illuminates when power is supplied to the camera. If an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel or MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit is connected to this unit, the CAM PW switch on the RCP or MSU panel must be illuminated to enable this switch to control the camera power supply.
71

7) MAIN POWER switch and indicator This switches the power supply on and off to the entire camera system including this unit, the camera and an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel connected to the REMOTE connector. The indicator illuminates when power is supplied to the system. Power is not supplied to an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit. 8) CABLE ALARM indicator SHORT: Illuminated when there is excessive current in the triax cable or when there is a short-circuit in the unit. OPEN: Illuminated when a triax cable is not connected to the CAMERA connector on the rear panel, or when the load current is extremely low even if a camera cable is connected.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Rear Panel

ANALOG INPUT block 5 PROMPTER connectors


4 REFERENCE connectors 3 RET1 through RET4 connectors 2 MIC OUTPUT connectors 1 CAMERA connector
CAMERA
CH-1

ANALOG OUTPUT block 6 R, G, and B connectors


7 Y, R-Y, and B-Y connectors 8 CHARACTER connector 9 WF1 and WF2 connectors 10 PIX1 and PIX2 connectors 11 VBS1, VBS2, and VBS3 connectors 12 SYNC connector
MIC OUTPUT
CH-2 RET1

INPUT
REFERENCE R Y WF1

OUTPUT
VBS1 WF MODE

CCU-700AP
RET2 G R-Y PIX1 VBS2

REMOTE HIS
RET3 B B-Y WF2 VBS3 110.120V RET4 CHARACTER PIX2 SYNC AUX ~ AC IN 220.240V RCP/CNU

REMOTE
MIC

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

COAX
INTERCOM RET1 RET2 1 2 3

25 Voltage selector

SERIAL INPUT

SERIAL OUTPUT

24 MIC REMOTE connector 23 INTERCOM REMOTE connector 22 RTS connectors 21 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector 20 COAX connector 19 Spare connectors

13

AC IN connector

14 WF MODE connector 15 RCP/CNU REMOTE connector 16 AUX REMOTE connector DIGITAL VIDEO block 17 SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2, and 3 connectors 18 SERIAL INPUT RET 1 and RET 2 connectors

1) CAMERA connector (triax connector) Connection for a BVP-900 Camera using a triax cable. All of the signals to and from the camera, including power, control, video and audio are carried via a single triax cable. Alternative camera connector blocks are available to accommodate the various types of triax connector in use. 2) MIC OUTPUT (microphone output) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Output the microphone signals from the camera. 3) RET1 through RET4 (return video 1 through 4 input) connectors (BNC type) Accept the return video signals from four different systems.
Note: When an optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed, the RET 1 and 2 connectors in the ANALOG INPUT block are disabled.

4) REFERENCE (reference signal input) loop connectors (BNC type) Accept a reference signal, such as a black burst, for external synchronization. 5) PROMPTER (prompter signal input) loop connectors (BNC type) Accept the signal from a teleprompter. 6) R, G and B (R, G and B signal output) connectors (BNC type) Provide a set of R, G and B signals for a chroma keyer. 7) Y, R-Y and B-Y (component video signal output) connectors (BNC type) Provide a set of Y, R-Y and B-Y signals for a digital component VTR or a video switcher. 8) CHARACTER (character signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies self-diagnostic results from this unit as a video signal. 9) WF1 and WF2 (waveform monitor 1 and 2 output) connectors (BNC type)

Supply the video signals for a waveform monitor. The MONITOR SELECT buttons on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel select the signal output from the WF 1 connector, and the WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit select the signal output from the WF 2 connector. 10) PIX1 and PIX2 (picture monitor 1 and 2 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply video signals for picture monitors. The MONITOR SELECT buttons on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel select the signal output from the PIX 1 connector, and the PICTURE MONITOR buttons on the MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit select the signal output from the PIX 2 connector. 11) VBS1, VBS2 and VBS3 (composite video signal 1, 2 and 3 output) connectors (BNC type) Supply composite video signals (VBS) from the camera. 12) SYNC (sync signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the sync signals (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) generated by the builtin sync generator. Connect to the sync input connector of a waveform or picture monitor. 13) ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CCU-700A/700AP using the supplied plug holder. 14) WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin) Connect to the corresponding connector of a waveform monitor to monitor signals in sequential mode. A sequential control signal is output from this connector when you press the SEQ button on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel, providing simultaneous monitoring of the R, G and B signals.

10

72

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


15) RCP/CNU REMOTE (remote control panel/camera command network unit /remote control connector (8-pin) Connect an MSU-700, CNU-700, CNU-500 or RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5 cable. Control signals are then accepted. When an RCP-700 Series panel is connected, power is also supplied to the unit. 16) AUX (auxiliary) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connection for an external system. For details on connections, refer to an authorized Sony representative. 17) SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2 and 3 (serial digital video signal 1, 2 and 3 output) connectors (BNC type) Camera output serial digital video signals are available from these connectors when an optional BKP-7311 SDI output board is installed in the CCU. The outputs from these connectors provide signals to a digital video switcher, component digital VTR, etc. 18) SERIAL INPUT RET 1 AND RET 2 (serial digital video signal 1 and 2 output) connectors (BNC type) These connectors accept 10-bit, 4:2:2 component serial digital video signals as return video 1 and 2 signals. They function when an optional BKP-7312 SDI input board is installed in the CCU. When this BKP-7312 is installed, the RET 1 and RET 2 connectors in the ANALOG INPUT block are disabled. 19) Spare connectors (BNC type) 20) COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) Accepts and supplies the signals normally carried by a triax cable, except for power, by setting a switch on the internal DM board. For connection, use a coaxial cable. When a return video function is used, the maximum cable length of a 5C-2V (RG-6A/U) coaxial cable is 800 m (2,624 feet). With the optional long distance board installed, the maximum cable length is increased to 1,000 m (3,280 feet). 21) INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (program audio) connector (19-pin) Supplies and accepts intercom, tally and program audio signals. Connect to the corresponding connector on the intercom system. 22) RTS (RTS intercom) connectors (XLR 3-pin) Connection for an RTS intercom system. 23) INTERCOM REMOTE connector (D-sub 25-pin) Connection for an external controller to control intercom muting, producer line interruption and engineer line interruption. This connector outputs the red tally, green tally, call signals and camera number. 24) MIC REMOTE (microphone remote control) connector (D-sub 15-pin) Connection for an external control unit, from which the microphone input levels of the camera can be set to -60, -50, -40, -30 or -20 dB. You can also set these microphone input levels with the switch on the internal board of the CCU. This connector outputs the red tally and green tally signals. For details on setting the microphone input levels with the internal switch, refer to the system manual. 25) Voltage selector (CCU-700AP only) The operating voltage of the CCU-700AP is factory set to 220 to 240 V AC. If the voltage of your local power line is different, contact Sony service personnel to change the voltage selector setting.

73

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(e) CCU-550/550P
Front Panel

Camera number sheet/tally indicator 2 POWER switch/CAM and MAIN indicators

CABLE ALARM indicators

POWER
CAM MAIN

CABLE ALARM
OPEN SHORT

NCOM MIC - ON
OFF PGM

PROD
PREV PGM

INCOM input/output/setting section

1) Camera number sheet/tally indicator Lights red when the red tally signal is input (e.g. when the video signal from the camera connected to the CCU-550/550P goes on air). When the CALL button on the camera, an MSU-700, RCP-700 Series Remote Control panel or an optional BKP-5973 (CCU-550/550P Front Panel) is pressed, the lamp is illuminated if it was not lit, or is turned off if it was already illuminated. The indicator illuminates green when the green tally signal is input (e.g. when the video signal from the camera connected to the CCU-550/550P goes off air). Attach the supplied number sheet here to indicate the camera number. 2) POWER switch/CAM (camera) and MAIN indicators This POWER switch turns the power supply on and off to the entire camera system, including the CCU-550/550P, the camera and the remote control unit connected to the REMOTE connector of the CCU. The MAIN and CAM indicators illuminate when the POWER switch is turned on. The CAM indicator goes out when the power is turned off by the CAM PW button on the remote control panel or the master set-up unit, or by the CAM POWER switch on the internal AT board. 3) CABLE ALARM indicators OPEN: illuminates when a triax cable is not connected to the CAMERA connector on the rear panel of the CCU550/550P, or when the load current is extremely low even when a camera cable is connected. SHORT: illuminates when there is excessive current flow in the triax cable. 4) INCOM (intercom) input/output/setting section INCOM (intercom) connector (XLR 5-pin): Headset connector for a headset. When you wish to use with a plug other than an XLR 5-pin type, consult an authorized Sony representative.

INCOM level control: Adjusts the input level of the intercom. MIC/PGM (program audio) switch: ON: The headset microphone is switched on. OFF: The headset microphone is switched off. PGM: Program audio is output. When this position is selected, the INCOM level control adjusts the output level of the program audio. INCOM selector: Selects the routing of intercom signals output/input through the INCOM/TALLY/PGM connector. PROD: Selects the producer line. PRIV: The producer line and engineer line are disabled and communication is restricted to that between the CCU550/550P and the camera connected to its rear panel. ENG: Selects the engineer line.

10

74

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Rear Panel
1

CAMERA connector

MIC OUTPUT connectors


3

INPUT connectors

OUTPUT connectors

SERIAL OUTOPUT connectors

INPUT CAMERA
REFERENCE

Y/G

OUTPUT VBS3

SERIAL OUTPUT VBS1

RET1

R-Y/R

WF

VBS2

MIC OUTPUT
CH-1 CH-2

RET2

B-Y/B

WF MODE

PROMPTER/RET3

PIX

COAX

RCP/CHU 10

AC IN connector

MIC REMOTE

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM

REMOTE

9 8 7 6

COAX connector

RCP/CNU REMOTE connector

INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector

MIC REMOTE connector

1) CAMERA connector (triax connector) Connector for the triax cable to the CA-550/550P Camera Adaptor attached to the BVP-950/550 Camera. 2) MIC (microphone) OUTPUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) Outputs the microphone signals from the camera. 3) INPUT connectors REFERENCE INPUT loop connectors (BNC type): Accepts a reference signal (black burst signal) for external synchronization. RET1/RET2 (return video signal 1/2) loop connectors (BNC type): Accepts a return video signal from two different sources. To select RET 1, press the RET button on the camera lens; to select RET 2, press the VTR button on the camera lens. PROMPTER/RET3 (return video signal 3) loop connectors (BNC type): Accepts a teleprompter signal or a return video signal. Use the switch on the internal DM board to select PROMPTER or RET 3. You can also select RET 3 by simultaneously pressing the RET and VTR buttons on the camera lens or using external controls (such as a pan bar box). For details on the internal boards, refer to the system manual. 4) OUTPUT connectors Y/G, R-Y/R, B-Y/B (component video signal output/RGB)
75

connectors (BNC type): Output component signals or RGB signals for a chroma keyer. Use the switch on the internal VA board to select the type of signals to be output. For details on the internal board, refer to the system manual. VBS/1/2/3 (composite video signal 1/2/3 output connectors (BNC type): Ouput the signal from the camera in composite format. Use the switch on the internal VA board to select the composite video signal or sync signal output from the VBS 3 connector. When the sync signal (0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms) is selected, connect the VBS 3 connector to the sync input of a waveform or picture monitor. WF (waveform monitor output) connector (BNC type): Supplies a video signal to a waveform monitor. The WAVEFORM MONITOR button on a MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, the MONITOR SELECT button on the RCP740/741 Remote Control Panel or the MONITOR SELECT control on the BKP-5973 (optional CCU550/550P Front Panel) selects the signal output from the WF connector. Changing the signal output from the WF connector on the RCP-740/741 or the BKP-5973 simultaneously changes the picture on the picture monitor.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin): Connects to the corresponding connector on a waveform monitor to allow the sequential monitoring of signals. PIX (picture monitor output) connector (BNC type): Supplies a video signal, or video with character signals, to a picture monitor. Use the PICTURE MONITOR button on the MSU-700, the MONITOR SELECT button on the RCP-740/741 or the MONITOR SELECT control on the BKP-5973 (optional CCU-550/550P Front Panel) to select the signal output from the PIX connector. When the signal output from the PIX connector on the RCP740/741 or the BKP-5973 is changed, the waveform on the waveform monitor also changes. 5) SERIAL OUTPUT (serial digital video/audio output) connectors (BNC type) Supply the video/microphone signals from the camera in serial digital format. These connectors are active only when the optional BKP-5972 SDI Output Board is attached to the CCU-550/550P. Connect to a digital video switcher or component digital VTR. 6) MIC REMOTE (microphone remote control) connector (D-sub, 15-pin) Connection for an external control unit, from which the microphone input levels of the camera can be set to -60, -50, -40, -30 or -20 dB. You can also set these microphone input levels with the switch on the

internal AT board of the CCU. For details on setting the microphone input levels with the internal switch, refer to the system manual. 7) INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (program audio) connector (D-sub, 25-pin) Inputs/outputs intercom, tally and program audio signals. Connects to an intercom, tally or program audio connector of an intercom system. 8) RCP/CNU REMOTE (remote control panel/camera command network remote) connector (8-pin) Connects to an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit, CNU-700/CNU-500 Camera Command Network Unit or an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel with an optional CCA-5 connecting cable to transmit/receive control signals. When the remote control panel is connected, it is powered through this connector. 9) COAX (coaxial) connector (BNC type) Accepts and supplies signals from/to the camera according to the setting of a switch on the internal DM board. Power is not supplied to the camera through this connector. Connect a coaxial cable from a camera to this connector. 10) AC IN (AC power input) connector Connects to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. Secure the power cord to the CCU-550/550P using the supplied plug holder.

Internal power switch and internal boards

10
2

Internal boards

AD

AT
POWER
CAM MAIN

CABLE ALARM
OPEN SHORT

VA

NCOM MIC - ON
OFF PGM

PROD
PREV PGM

AU

DM

Internal power switch

1) Internal power switch When an abnormality has occurred and power cannot be cut off by pressing the POWER switch on the front panel, open the front panel and turn off this power switch. 2) Internal boards Refer to the system manual. Self-Diagnostics When an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel is connected to the CCU-550/550P, this control panel can initiate the display of the

results of self-diagnostics of the CCU internal boards. Self-diagnostics of the camera system The results of self-diagnostics of the camera system are displayed on three pages superimposed on the CCU monitoring output.. To display the results, press the CHARACTER button on the RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel. Press the CHARACTER button again to display successive pages.

76

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Page 1 CAMERA MIC Gain: Gain and control status of the microphone circuit For details on the internal boards, refer to the system manual.
*System Diag 1/3* TRIAX Cable Comp. Step Timer Connect Auto 2 OH

TRIAX Cable: Triax cable connection status (connected/disconnected). TRIAX Comp: Cable compensation of the triax cable (automatic/manual). TRIAX Step: Triax cable length. Timer: Elapsed time on the CCU-550/550P internal AT board. For details on the internal boards, refer to the system manual. Page 2
*System Diag 2/3* CAMERA Cable Data Power Tone RCP/CNU Cable Data Power PANEL Data Connect OK ON OK Connect OK Ok OK

Results of self-diagnostics of the CCU-550/550P internal boards The results of the self-diagnostics of the CCU-550/550P internal boards are displayed on five pages. To display the results, press the CHARACTER button on the RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel while page 3 of the self-diagnostics of the camera system is displayed. Press the CHARACTER button again to display successive pages. DM board
*DM Diag* CAMERA Video Y OK R-Y OK B-Y OK Prompter NO Video PRMPT/RET3 RET3 TRIAX Comp. Auto Step 2 Retern Video OK

CAMERA Cable: Camera cable connection status (connected/disconnected). CAMERA Data: Camera data transmission status. CAMERA Power: Power supply status of the camera. CAMERA Tone: Camera ID tone status. RCP/CNU Cable: Connection status of RCP/CNU connector (connected/disconnected). RCP/CNU Data: Data transmission status of the RCP/CNU connector. RCP/CNU Power: Power supply status of the RCP/CNU connector. PANEL Data: Data transmission status of the BKP-5973. For details on the internal boards, refer to the system manual. Page 3

CAMERA Video: Status of the Y, R-Y and B-Y signals of the triax signal. Prompter: Prompter status. PRMPT/RET3: Selection of cable compensation for the triax cable (automatic/manual). TRIAX Comp: Selection of cable compensation for the triax cable (automatic/manual). TRIAX Step: Length of the triax cable. Return Video: Return video signal input status. For details on the internal DM board, refer to the system manual. AT board
*AT Diag* Command CAMERA RCP/CNU CAMERA Tone CAMERA Power CCU Paint Data MIC Gain Cont. Local CH1 60dB CH2 40dB OK OK OK OK Clear

*System Diag 3/3* Intercom CAMERA CH1 PROD MIC OFF CAMERA MIC Gain Cont. Local CH1 60dB CH2 40dB

Intercom CAMERA CH1: Status of intercom 1 (producer/engineer). Intercom CAMERA CH1 MIC: Microphone status of intercom 1 (on/off).
77

Command CAMERA: Connection of commands to the CAMERA connector. Command RCP/CNU: Connection of commands to the RCP/CNU connector. CAMERA Tone: Check of the ID tone from the camera. CAMERA Power: Power supply status of the camera. CCU Paint Data: On/off of analog control preset on the AT board of the CCU-550/550P. MIC Gain: Gain and control status of the microphone circuit of the camera For details on the internal AT board, refer to the system manual.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

VA board
*VA Diag* Video Out VBS1/2 VBS3 Y PIX WF CAMERA Phase Reference Phase OK OK OK OK OK Lock Unlock

Video out: Video signal output status of each video output connector. CAMERA Phase: Locking status of the H-phase between the camera and the CCU-550/550P. Reference Phase: Locking status of the CCU-550/550P with the input reference signal. For details on the internal VA board, refer to the system manual. AU board

*AU Diag* Audio RF OK

10
Audio RF: Status of the audio RF signal output from the internal AU board to the triax cable For details on the internal AU board, refer to the system manual AD board

*AD Diag* Video PLL Audio PLL Power OK OK OK

Video PLL: Locking status of the video serial clock with the video parallel clock Audio PLL: Locking status of the audio clock with the video parallel clock Power: Power supply status of the AD board For details on the AD board, refer to the system manual.

78

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(f) CNU-700
1

POWER switch and indicator


CAMERACOMMAND NETWORK UNIT

Front panel
POWER

4 3 2

RCP 1 through 6 connectors

MSU connector 5 VCS connector


6

CCU 1 through 6 connectors


1 2 3 CCU 4 5 6 1 2 3 RCP 4 5 6 MSU VCS AUX1

AUX1 and AUX2 connectors


AUX2

Rear panel
7 8 9 CCU 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 MSC VCS AUX3 AUX4 ~AC IN

10 9 8 7

Optional board insertion section ~AC IN connector


11

RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors

REFERENCE connectors

CHARACTER 1 and 2 connectors

1) POWER switch and indicator Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. 2) CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU REMOTE connector on a CCU700A/700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable. 3) RCP (remote control panel) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connectors on an RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5 cable. 4) MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable. 5) VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin) Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable. 6) AUX1 and AUX2 (auxiliary 1 and 2) connectors (8-pin) Connect to the AUX1 or AUX2 connector of another CNU-700 using a CCA-5 cable when controlling multiple cameras with two or more CNU-700 units. You can connect up to eight CNU-700 units. 7) CHARACTER 1and 2 connectors (BNC type) Supply character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-and-white video signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no reference signal is input, the CNU-700 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525line video signal, the CNU-700 for other countries supplies a 625-line
79

video signal. You can select whether to add a sync signal to the output signal with switch S7 (SYNC ON/OFF) on the AT board. Refer to the system manual for details on the board switch settings. 8) REFERENCE (reference signal input) loop connectors (BNC type) Accepts a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal. 9) RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors (D-sub 9-pin) Used for RS-232C interfaces. The function of these connectors depends on whether or not an optional BKP-7930 System Expansion Board is installed in the CNU-700 as shown below.
Connector No. 1 2 3 Not used No BKP-7930 installed With BKP-7930 installed

Reserved for ISR system Reserved for RS-232C interface Reserved for RS-232C system

10) ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU-700 using the supplied plug holder. 11) Optional board insertion section Used for attaching the connector panel of an optional BKP-7930/7933. When you attach the BKP-7930 to the CNU-700, up to 12 cameras and remote control panels can be controlled. BKP-7933 enables the S-bus functionality.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(g) CNU-500
Front and Rear Panel Front panel

POWER switch and indicator


2

CNU number indicator


CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT

POWER

Rear panel
4 3

MSU connector CCU 1 through 6 connectors


CCU1 CCU2 CCU3 CCU4 CCU5 CCU6 MSU CHARACTER RS232C

5 6

CHARACTER connector RS-232C connector


~AC IN

11 10 9

RCP 1 through 6 connectors VCS connector AUX connctor

7 8

~AC IN connector REFERENCE connectors

1) POWER switch and indicator Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. 2) CNU number indicator Attach the number plate. 3) CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU/ REMOTE connector of a CCU700A/700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5 cable. 4) MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin) Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable. 5) CHARACTER connector (BNC type) Supplies character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-and-white video signal. The signal output is automatically selected according to the reference signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no signal is input to the REFERENCE connector, the CNU-500 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525-line video signal, and the CNU-500 for other countries supplies a 625-line video signal.

6) RS-232C connector (D-sub 9-pin) Used for the RS-232C interface. This connector is reserved for the ISR system. 7) ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU-500 using the supplied plug holder. 8) REFERENCE (reference signal input) connector (BNC type) Accept a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal output from the CHARACTER connector is synchronized with the input signal. 9) AUX (auxiliary) connector (8-pin) Not used. 10) VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin) Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700 Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable. 11) RCP (remote control panel) 1through 6 connectors (8-pin) Connect to the CNU/CCU REMOTE connector on RCP-700 Series Remote Control PanelS using a CCA-5 cable.

10

Internal Board

OPERATION +5
NORMAL EMERGENCY

MODE

CHARACTER

SYNC
OFF ON

UP DOWN SET CANCEL PHUSE

1 +5 V indicator 2 OPERATION switch

3 MODE switch 4 UP/DOWN switch 5 SET/CANCEL switch

6 SYNC ON/OFF switch 7 CHARACTER PHASE

control

80

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


1) +5 V indicator Lights when +5 V power to the board. 2) OPERATION switch NORMAL: Set to this position for normal operation. EMERGENCY: Set to this position when the CNU-500 or MSU700 cannot function normally. The RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panels are directly connected to their respective camera control units. The switch is set to NORMAL at the factory. 3) MODE switch 0: Factory setting 1: When the switch is set to this position, the UP/DOWN switch is activated, and the switch changes the character page displayed on a monitor connected to the CHARACTER connector. 2 through F: Not used. 4) UP/DOWN switch Changes the page displayed on the monitor screen. This switch functions only when the MODE switch is set to 1. The contents of each page are shown in the following table.
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Contents Nothing appears when power is turned on. Shows a warning if a problem is detected by the self-diagnosis of the camera. Connection status of Cameras 1 through 6. Not used. Not used. Shows the results of auto set-up of Cameras 1 through 6. Cannot be used. DIAGNOSIS OF ALL CAMERAS display, which shows the results of the self-diagnosis of all the cameras. Not used. DIAGNOSIS OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the results of the self-diagnosis of the selected camera. DATA OF ALL CAMERAS display, which shows the setting status of each camera. DATA OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows the setting status of the selected camera.

5) SET/CANCEL switch Selects the displayed item or camera (CAM) when display page 9, 10 or 11 appears on the monitor screen. 6) SYNC ON/OFF switch Selects whether the sync signal is to be added to the video signal output from the CHARACTER connector. At the factory, the switch is set to ON (added). 7) CHARACTER PHASE control Adjusts the horizontal phase of the signal output from the CHARACTER connector, referring to the reference signal. Adjust the phase by monitoring the signal on the monitor screen.

(h) VCS-700

1 POWER switch and indicator

Front panel

POWER

VIDEO SELECTOR

4 PIX A INPUT connector 3 CHARACTER INPUT connectors 2 PIX 1 through PIX 6 INPUT connectors 5 PIX A OUTPUT connector 6 PIX B OUTPUT connector 7 SYNC OUT connector

Rear Panel

8 WF 1 through WF 6 INPUT connectors 9 WF A INPUT connector 10 WF A OUTPUT connector 11 WF B OUTPUT connector

15 ~AC IN connector 14 I/O PORT connector 13 REMOTE connector 12 WF MODE connector

81

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) POWER switch and indicator This switch turns the power ON and OFF. The indicator illuminates when power is switched on. 2) PIX1 through PIX6 INPUT (picture monitor 1 through 6 input) connectors (BNC type) Accept video signals for a picture monitor. Connect each of these connectors to the PIX2 OUTPUT connector on the CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 30 meters (99 feet) long can be compensated with the switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the system manual. 3) CHARACTER INPUT connectors (BNC type) Accept character signals. The input signal is mixed with the signal output from the PIX OUTPUT connector. Connect to the CHARACTER connector on the CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit. When using two VCS-700 units, connect either of these connectors to the CHARACTER INPUT connector on a second VCS-700. When a bridge connection is not made, be sure to terminate with 75 ohms. 4) PIX A INPUT (picture monitor A input) connector (BNC type) Connect to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when using two or more VCS-700 selectors. 5) PIX A OUTPUT (picture monitor A output) connector (BNC type) Supplies a video signal for a picture monitor. Select the output signal with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700 or by command from the I/O PORT connector on the VCS-700 Video Selector. When using two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the PIX A INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a picture monitor to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on the final VCS-700 in the series connection. 6) PIX B OUTPUT (picture monitor B output ) connector (BNC type) Supplies the same video signal for a picture monitor as the PIX A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 100 meters (330 feet) long can be compensated with the switch on the internal board. When you connect a picture monitor using a long connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two or more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a picture monitor to the PIX B OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 whose PIX A OUTPUT connector is not used for series connection. For details on cable compensation, refer to the system manual. 7) SYNC OUT (sync signal output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the sync signal for a picture monitor. 8) WF1 through WF6 INPUT (waveform monitor 1 through 6 input) connectors (BNC type) Accept video signals for a waveform monitor. Connect these connectors as required to the WF2 OUTPUT connector on CCU700A/700AP Camera Control Units. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 30 meters (99 feet) long can be compensated with the switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the system manual. 9) WF A INPUT (waveform monitor A input) connector (BNC type) Connect to the WF A OUTPUT connector on a second VCS-700 when using two of these units. 10) WF A OUTPUT (waveform monitor A output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the video signal for a waveform monitor. Select the output

signal with the camera select buttons on an MSU-700 or by command from the I/O PORT connector on a VCS-700. When using two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the WF A INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a waveform monitor to the WF A OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 which is the last unit in the series connection. 11) WF B OUTPUT ( waveform monitor B output) connector (BNC type) Supplies the same video signal for a waveform monitor as the WF A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a connecting up to 100 meters (330 feet) cable long can be compensated with the switch on the internal board. When you connect a waveform monitor using long connecting cable, connect it to this connector. When using two or more VCS-700 units connected in series, connect a waveform monitor to the PIX B OUTPUT connector on the VCS-700 whose WF A OUTPUT loop connector is not used for series connection. For details on cable compensation, refer to the system manual. 12) WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector (4-pin) Connect to a corresponding connector on a waveform monitor to view the signals in sequential mode. This connector supplies a staircase signal and sequential ON/OFF control signal. 13) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect a CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit using a CCA-5 cable. 14) I/O PORT (remote control) connector (D-sub 37-pin) Accepts and supplies external control signals. You can select the signals output to a picture monitor and a waveform monitor with an external video selector connected to this connector. The selected input connector number is supplied from this connector. 15) ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the VCS-700 using the supplied plug holder.

10

82

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(i) MSU-700
Operation Panel
5 4 3 2 1

CLOSE button

STANDARD button
7

Signal output select buttons

AUTO SETUP block


8

VF PW button

Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons


9

CAM PW button Scene file control block


10 Menu operation block

ALL button

AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK

MODE
WHITE BLACK

KNEE OFF

DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

KNEE KNEE APERTURE SAT

MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECT

MULTI

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK GAMMA GATE

CHARACTER

CARD

5
STORE

CONFIGURATION

SCENE FILES

MAINTENANCE

ECS
FILE

ON
ACCESS ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN
PAINT

ENC
FILTER CTRL

3
ND

5
MASTER BLACK IRIS EXT IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO

SEQ

ENC

C
CC

PARA

MULTI TALLY

PANEL ACTIVE

1
EXPAND

10

11

12

11 PC card insertion block 12 PICTURE MONITOR

21 Iris control block 20 Camera number/tally indication

buttons 13 WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons


14 Camera select block 15 Filter control block

window
19 CALL button 18 MASTER BLACK control block 17 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 16 ECS/Shutter control block (left)

Gamma control block (center) Master gain control block (right)

1) All button Press the button so it starts flashing to activate the 13 buttons located to the right (from CAM PW to AUTO SETUP) for all the connected cameras of the same group. Allows simultaneous control of these functions for all connected cameras 2) CAM PW (camera power) button Press this button to turn the power supply to the camera ON. The button illumination flashes until the camera is ready for transmission. When you press this button again the power supply to the camera is turned off and the button flashes again. 3) VF PW (viewfinder power) button Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again the illumination and the power supply are turned off. 4) Signal output select buttons Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the camera test
83

signal generator and output the selected signal. TEST1: To output a sawtooth signal to test the video circuit. TEST2: To output a staircase signal. BARS: To output a color bar signal.
Note The BARS button takes priority over the other two buttons. If the BARS button is illuminated, press it to turn off the illumination before pressing the TEST1 or TEST2 button.

5) CLOSE (iris close) button Press and illuminate the button to close the lens iris. Press again to release the close mode. 6) STANDARD button When this button is pressed, the camera is initialized to its standard state, the button remaining illuminated for several seconds. If you press the button while it is lit, the cameras returns its state before the button was lit. For details, refer to the system manual.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

7) AUTO SETUP block


a b
AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK

WHITE

BLACK

(a) Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue. LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. (b) START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated during adjustment and the illumination is turned off when the adjustments are complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (c) WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (d) BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Notes * If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes. * The leftmost button is for future use and has no current function.

* Middle row (ON when the button is illuminated) KNEE APERTURE: Knee aperture function. KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function. MONO COLOR: Mono color function that replaces the color information of a picture with a single color that can be varied, for example to give a sepia tone effect. COLOR CORRECT: Color correction function for a particular hue range. * Lower row (ON when the button is illuminated) 5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. While this button is illuminated (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. While the button is illuminated (ON), the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the monitor screen. SATURATION: Saturation function CONTRAST: Contrast function BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function CHARACTER: System information display function. When this button is illuminated (ON), various information about the entire system is displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER connector of the CNU-700. The display contents can be changed through menu operation. 9) Scene file control block

10

5
STORE

SCENE FILES

8) CAMERA/CCU FUNCTION ON/OFF buttons (a) SCENE FILES buttons While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of these buttons, the current setting data is stored as a file with the corresponding number. When the STORE button is not illuminated: The stored data is retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button with the desired number. Press the button again to turn the illumination off and continue with the previous status. (b) STORE button To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button starts flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button with the desired number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button illumination is turned off. To cancel registration, press the flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FLIES button. The STORE button illumination is turned off.

KNEE OFF

DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

KNEE KNEE APERTURE SAT

MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECT

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK GATE GAMMA

CHARACTER

Various functions of a camera and a CCU-700A/700AP can be turned on and off from this unit. The following switching functions are assigned to 18 of the buttons at the factory, the remaining nine buttons are reserved for future use. * Upper row (OFF when the button is illuminated) KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function. DETAIL OFF: Detail compensation function. LVL DEP OFF: Level dependent function which controls the details in the dark part of a picture. GAMMA OFF: Gamma function. CHROMA OFF: Chroma function. MATRIX OFF: Multi matrix function to enhance color fidelity.

84

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


10) Menu operation block
MODE

MULTI

CARD

CONFIGURATION

MAINTENANCE

FILE

PAINT

(a) MODE (mode select) buttons Select menu mode. If you press and illuminate one of these buttons, the menu for the selected mode appears on the EL display. When the illuminated button is pressed its illumination is turned off and the

menu on the display also disappears. MULTI: Multi setting mode to set the requirements for Master/Slave mode to set up multiple cameras in synchronization. CARD: PC card operation mode to set the requirements for using PC cards. Card data can also be duplicated in this mode. CONFIGUARTION: Configuration mode to configure this unit and the entire camera system. MAINTENECE: Maintenance mode. The H and SC phases of the CCU-700A/700AP are set in this mode. FILE: File operation mode. Storing, retrieving and transferring reference files, lens files and scene files in the camera or on a PC card. PAINT: Paint control mode. Various paint items, such as white, black and flare, are adjusted in this mode. (b) Control knobs (rotary encoders) Adjust the selected items on the touch panel. (c) EL display/touch panel Displays the menu selected with the MODE buttons and permits the displayed items to be adjusted. For display example, see the following description.

Menu display Example: when the paint menu is selected (PAINT buttons illuminated).

To clear the adjusted values (see the adjustment display). The names of the items (item groups) are displayed. Press the name of the item (item group) to be adjusted. The pressed name area lights in reverse status and the lower half of the panel becomes the adjustment display.

Clear V Mod Saw Black Detail White Skin Detail Flare Sat/ Contrast Gamma /Knee

Home 1 3

Press to return to the first page of the menu. Press either to flip the pages of the menu. Current page number/Total number of pages (1/3 means that the Paint menu consists of 3 pages in all and that the first page of the menu is displayed at present.)

Adjustment display Example: Gamma/knee adjustment display (when Gamma/ Knee is selected from the paint menu).
Reversed
Clear V Mod Saw Black Detail White Skin Detail Flare Sat/ Contrast Gamma /Knee Home 1 3

The name of the selected item (item group) is displayed. By pressing this area after pressing "Clear" whereupon it is displayed in reverse status, all the adjustment values for the selected item (item group) are initialized to standard.

Gamma/Knee Gamma Black Auto Off Gamma Knee Off Knee Blk Gamma Knee Point Knee Slope Gamma

-28

-21

10

When there are any ON/OFF functions related to the adjustment, the names of the functions are displayed on this line. You can turn these functions on/off by pressing their names in the same manner as with the camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons.

The adjustment parameters (items) for the selected item (item group) and their adjustment values are displayed. By pressing a value area after pressing "Clear" whereupon it is displayed in reverse status, that adjustment value is initialized to standard.

85

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Submenu Example: Submenu of Detail (when Detail is selected from the Paint menu).

Detail 1

If the selected item group consists of multiple item groups, a submenu is displayed. Press the desired submenu item (Detail 1, Detail 2 or Detail 3 in this example).

Detail 1 Level

Detail Level Detail Detail 3 Dep Off Off 2 Limiter Crispening Level Dep

-7

42

99

11) PC card insertion block

b a
ACCESS

(a) PC card slot Insert a PC card (which conforms to PCMCIA) to store reference files, lens files and scene files of the camera or the CCU-700A/700AP. (b) Eject button Press to eject the inserted PC card. (c) ACCESS indicator This indicator is illuminated green when a PC card is correctly inserted in the PC card slot. The illumination changes to red during data access. If the built-in battery in the PC card is exhausted, this indicator illuminates in orange. For battery replacement, refer to the instructions for the PC card.

12) PICTURE MONITOR button Press to select the output signal from the PIX2 OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/700AP. The signal corresponding to the illuminated button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. These signals can be selected either independently or in combination. When any of these buttons is pressed, the encoder circuit is turned off. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B circuits are turned off and an encoded signal is output. 13) WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons Press to select the output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/700AP. The signal corresponding to the illuminated button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. These signals can be selected either independently or in combination. When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ and ENC circuits are turned off. SEQ (sequence): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B circuits are turned off and the SEQ signal is output. You can monitor the waveforms of the three R, G and B signals in sequence on a waveform monitor. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B and SEQ circuits are turned off and the ENC signal is output.

10

14) Camera select block


a b c d

PARA

MULTI TALLY

PANEL ACTIVE

1
EXPAND

10

11

12

(a) PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate this button to permit the cameras selected with the camera select button to be controlled from this unit. The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. If you press the button when it is lit, the illumination is turned off and the operational panel

of this unit is locked. (b) PARA (parallel mode) button Press and illuminate this button to activate the Parallel mode, which enables simultaneous operation with another control panel. If you press the button when it is lit, the illumination is turned off and the
86

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Parallel mode is canceled. (c) MULTI indicators Show the Master/Slave status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The indicator for the camera which is specified as the master for Master/Slave mode illuminates green. The indicators for the slave cameras are illuminated orange. This turns to red during the auto set-up of the corresponding cameras. If an error occurs during the auto set-up and the operation is interrupted, they flash in red. (d) TALLY indicators Show the tally status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The corresponding indicator illuminates in red when a red tally is sent to a camera, and it illuminates in green when a green tally is sent. When both red and green tally are sent, it illuminates in orange. When a call signal is sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes in red. (e) Active indicators Show the control status of the corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND button is not illuminated) or 13 through 24 (when the EXPAND button is illuminated). The indicators for the cameras under control of this unit illuminate in green and the indicators for the cameras under control of another control panel illuminate in orange. An indicator whose corresponding camera (or camera control unit) is not connected does not illuminate. An indicator illuminates in red when an error is detected and the selfdiagnostic functions are activated in the corresponding camera or camera control unit. (f) Camera select buttons Select the cameras to be controlled from this unit. Press and illuminate the button corresponding to each desired camera. Cameras 1 through 12 are selected when the EXPAND button is not illuminated, and cameras 13 through 24 are selected when the EXPAND button is illuminated. (g) EXPAND button Press to select the group to be selected with the camera select buttons. Cameras 1 through 12 can be chosen when their select buttons are not illuminated, and cameras 13 through 24 can be chosen when their buttons are illuminated.
Note The CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit is required to control multiple cameras using the camera select function.

one of these buttons to select the corresponding ND filter. 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/8 ND 4: 1/16 ND 5: 1/64 ND When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the button corresponding to the filter selected at the camera is illuminated. (c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is illuminated, press and illuminate one of these buttons to select the corresponding CC filter. A: Cross filter B: 3200 K C: 4300 K D: 6300 K E: 8000 K When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the button corresponding to the filter selected at the camera is illuminated. 16) ECS/Shutter control block (left) Gamma control block (center) Master gain control block (right)
a
ECS

ON
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA MASTER GAIN

15) Filter control block


a
1
FILTER CTRL

b
2 3
ND

C
CC

(a) FILTER CTRL (filter control) button Press and illuminate the button to enable filter selection with the CC and ND filter select buttons of this unit. (b) ND (ND filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is illuminated, press and illuminate
87

(a) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. Press again and turn off the button illumination to set the camera to Shutter mode. (b) ON button Turns the ECS function on and off (when the ECS button is illuminated) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not illuminated). The function is ON when this button is illuminated. (c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and display window In ECS mode (when the ECS button is illuminated): The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired scan frequency. The frequency increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not illuminated): The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(d) GAMMA select buttons and display window Select the step gamma. The selected value is displayed in the window. The gamma value decreases when the v(up) button is pressed and increases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed.
Note The higher the gamma effect, the lower the value.

green tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black against a green background. When both the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is red and the right half is green. 21) Iris control block
IRIS

(e) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window Select the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. The selected value (dB) is displayed in the window. The gain value increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes either button remains pressed. 17) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris and master black adjustment functions of this unit. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button automatically illuminates. To disable only the iris/master black control block of the panel, press this button so that it is not illuminated. 18) MASTER BLACK control block Turn the control to adjust the master black level. The adjustment value is displayed in the display window. 19) CALL button Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button is illuminated. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700A/700AP light if they not illuminated, or are turned off if they where illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this unit illuminates and a buzzer sounds. 20) Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this unit is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black against a red background. When a

EXT AUTO

(a) EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminated when the lens extender is in use. (b) IRIS control and display window When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning this control. The adjustment value is shown in f numbers on the display. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this control. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed in the window. (c) AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled.

10

Connector Panel
1 FUSE holder 2 POWER switch 3 ~AC IN connector 4 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 5 AUX REMOTE connector

REMOTE AUX CCU/CNU POWER FUSE ~AUX IN I/O PORT

6 I/O PORT connector

1) FUSE holder Accommodates the fuse. 2) POWER switch Turns the power to the unit on and off. 3) ~AC IN (AC power input) connector Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit using the supplied plug holder. 4) CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8-pin)

Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU-700A/700AP or the MSU connector of the CNU-700. 5) AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-pin) 6) I/O PORT connector (50-pin) Reserved for future use.

88

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(j) Connection Example When a CNU-500 is used as the nerve center of a star-shaped network, up to six CCU-700A/700AP units, up to six RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panels, a VCS-700 Video Selector and an MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit can be connected to the CNU-500.
Note The video input connectors on the CCU-700A/700AP, VCS-700 and CNU-500 which have loop-through configuration but are not being used for bridge connections, should be terminated with a 75 ohm termination.

BVP-900 Series Color Video Camera Control console

CCU-700A/700AP

Picture monitor Waveform monitor


RCP/CNU

AC power source

RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel


WF 1 PIX 1

VCS-700
CHARECTER REMOTE

PIX 2

WF 2

CCU/CNU

AC power source

RCP 1

CCU 1
CCU 1 CCU 2 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6

VCS
MSU

CHARECTER
CHARACTER RS232C AC IN

CNU-500

RCP 1

RCP 2

RCP 3

RCP 4

RCP 5

RCP 6

CS

AUX

REFERENCE

REFERENCE

MSU

RS232C

AC IN

RS-232C cable

Reference signal Computer for ISR system


CCU/CNU
REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX
POWER FUSE ~AC IN

AC power cord (supplied)

AC power source

I/O PORT

MSU-700 AC power source

89

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(j) RCP-740/741
Operation Panel

1 STANDARD button 2 Control select block 3 Power and output signal select block

LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE
CAM PW VF PW TEST1 TEST2 BARS

AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK

4 AUTO SETUP block


WHITE BLACK CHARACTER

STANDARD

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL CONTRAST BLACK GATE SATURATION GAMMA

5 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons

KNEE POINT SATURATION SKIN DETAIL R GAMMA R FLARE DTL LEVEL

KNEE SLOPE CONTRAST SKIN PHASE M GAMMA G FLARE DTL LIMITER SKIN WIDTH B GAMMA B FLARE BLK LIMITER DTL CRISP SKIN SAT BLK GAMMA

CLEAR

6 Paint control block

PAINT LOCK

1
ECS ON

5
STORE

SEQ

ENC

7 Scene file control block (left), Monitor select block (right) 8 ECS/Shutter control block (left), Gamma control block (center), Master gain control block (right), 9 Filter control block 10 White balance/black balance control block

SCENE FILES

MONITOR SELECT

ECS/SHUTTER

GAMMA

MASTER GAIN

3
ND

5
FILTER CTRL

C
CC

10

WHITE

ABSOLUTE

Reserved block (does not function at present)

BLACK

RELATIVE

11 Camera number/tally indication window


IRIS/MB ACTIVE RELATIVE
EXT
1.4 2.0

SENS

ALARM

CLOSE

2.8 CLOSE 4.0 OPEN

COARSE

CALL AUTO

5.6 8.0 11 15 22 CLO

MASTER BLACK

PANEL ACTIVE

IRIS

RCP-740 14 ALARM indicator 13 CALL button 12 PANEL ACTIVE button

IRIS/MB ACTIVE RELATIVE


EXT
1.4 2.0

CLOSE

AUTO

SENS

CLOSE

OPEN

COARSE

ALARM

2.8 4.0

Iris/master black control block

CALL MASTER BLACK

5.6 8.0 11 15

PANEL ACTIVE PREVIEW IRIS

22 CLOSE

RCP-741 14 ALARM indicator 13 CALL button 12 PANEL ACTIVE button

90

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


1) STANDARD button When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the button is pressed while illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the button was illuminated. For details, refer to the system manual. 2) Control select block
a b c a LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE

Note The BARS button takes priority over the other two buttons. If the BARS button is illuminated, press the button to turn the illumination off before pressing the TEST1 or TEST2 button.

4) AUTO SETUP block


AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK

WHITE

BLACK

(a) LOCK button Press and illuminate this button to disable controls except those in the iris/master black control block. Press the button again to enable the controls. (b) PARA (parallel mode) button This button is illuminated when the Parallel mode is active, in which simultaneous operation with another control panel is possible. When this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel, except for the iris/master black control block, are active - even if the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and the Parallel mode is canceled. (c) MASTER and SLAVE buttons When adjusting the white balance of multiple cameras in Master/Slave mode, it is necessary to decide which is to be the master camera and which are to be slave cameras. Press and illuminate the MASTER button to specify the connected camera to be the master. Press and illuminate the SLAVE button to specify the connected camera to be a slave. The slave camera follows the master camera settings. If you press a button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off. 3) Power and output signal select block
a b c

(a) Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue. LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. (b) STRAT/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated until adjustment is complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again. (c) WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (d) BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Notes * If an error occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes. * The leftmost button is for future use and has no function at present.

5) Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons


CAM PW VF PW TEST1 TEST2 BARS

(a) CAM PW (camera power) button Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the camera ON. (The button flashes until the camera is ready for transmission.) When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply is turned off. (b) VF PW (viewfinder power) button Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again, the illumination goes out and the power supply is turned off. (c) Signal output select buttons Press and illuminated one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the camera and send the following signals. TEST1: Send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits. TEST2: Send a staircase signal. BARS: Send a color bar signal.

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL CONTRAST BLACK GATE SATURATION GAMMA

CHARACTER

Various functions of the camera and the CCU-700A/700AP can be turned on and off from this panel. The following switching functions are assigned to eight of the buttons at the factory. The other two buttons are reserved for future use. Press and illuminate these buttons to turn on the respective function. Press again so that the button is not illuminated to turn off the function. 5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is illuminated, the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function.

91

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this button is illuminated, the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the monitor screen. SATURATION: Saturation function. CONTRAST: Contrast function. BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function. CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When this button is illuminated, details of the CCU700A/700AP diagnosis are displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/700AP. This information is also mixed with the video signal output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each time you press this button, the status changes as follows. Off ON (page 1) ON (page2) ... ON (page n) The contents of the self-diagnosis can be displayed as required, even if this button is not illuminated. 6) Paint control block
KNEE POINT SATURATION SKIN DETAIL R GAMMA R FLARE DTL LEVEL KNEE SLOPE CONTRAST SKIN PHASE M GAMMA G FLARE DTL LIMITER SKIN WIDTH B GAMMA B FLARE BLK LIMITER DTL CRISP SKIN SAT BLK GAMMA

with the left three controls. DTL LEVEL/DTL LIMITER/BLK LIMITER/DTL CRISP: To adjust the detail level, detail limiter level, black limiter level and detail crisp level, using the four controls respectively.
Note When the corresponding paint function is not active, the item name is not illuminated in yellow and the item cannot be controlled from this panel.

(d) PAINT LOCK button Press and illuminated the button to disable paint control from this panel. While this button is illuminated, only item switching with the paint item select buttons v and w are enabled. 7) Scene file control block (left) Monitor select block (right)
a b c

5
STORE

SEQ

ENC

SCENE FILES

MONITOR SELECT

b
CLEAR

d
PAINT LOCK

(a) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers Adjust the items selected with the paint item select buttons v and w. The LED level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of the respective items. A marker to which an item is not assigned is not illuminated. (b) CLEAR button Press and hold for more than one second to clear the manually adjusted settings of the selected items and continue with the standard settings (which can be defined by the user). (c) Paint item select buttons and indicators Press either the v(up) and w(down) button to illuminate the green indicator corresponding to the paint items to be adjusted. The names of the selected items are illuminated in yellow and can be adjusted using the respective paint controls (rotary encoders). KNEE POINT/KNEE SLOPE: To adjust the knee point and knee slope using the left two controls. SATURATION/CONTRAST: To adjust the saturation and contrast using the left two controls. SKIN DETAIL/SKIN PHASE/SKIN WIDTH/SKIN SAT: To adjust the detail level, phase, bandwidth and saturation of the skin tone, respectively using the four controls. R GAMMA/G GAMMA/B GAMMA: To adjust the gamma balance with the left three controls. R FLARE/B FLARE/G FLARE: To adjust the flare balance

(a) SCENE FILES buttons While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of these buttons, the current setting data is stored as a file with the corresponding number. When the STORE button is not illuminated: The stored data can be retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button corresponding to the required file number. Press the button to turn the illumination off and continue with the previous status. (b) STORE button To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button starts flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button with the desired number. When file registration is complete, the STORE button is no longer illuminated. To cancel the registration, press the flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FLIES button. The STORE button illumination is turned off. (c) MONITOR SELECT buttons Press to select the output signal from the PIX1 and WF1 OUTPUT connectors of the CCU-700A/700AP. The signal corresponding to the illuminated button is output. R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal or B signal. The signals can be selected either independently or in combination and are output from the PIX1 and WF1 OUTPUT connectors. When any of these buttons is pressed, the SEQ and ENC circuits are turned off. SEQ (sequential): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B circuits for the WF1 OUTPUT are turned off and the SEQ signal is output from the WF1 OUTPUT connector. You can monitor the waveforms of the R, G and B signals in sequence on a monitor connected to the WF1 OUTPUT connector. The PIX1 OUTPUT connector continues outputting the same signal as it was before this button was pressed. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/B and SEQ circuits for both the WF1 and PIX1 OUTPUTs are turned off. The ENC signal is output from both the WF1 and PIX1 OUTPUT connectors.

10

92

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


8) ECS/Shutter control block (left) Gamma control block (center) Master gain control block (right)
a

ECS ON

ECS/SHUTTER

GAMMA

MASTER GAIN

(a) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button Press and illuminate this button to put the camera into ECS mode. Press again and turn off the button illumination to set the camera into Shutter mode. (b) ON button Turns the ECS function on and off (when the ECS button is illuminated) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not illuminated). The selected function is ON when this button is illuminated. (c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and display window In ECS mode (when the ECS button is illuminated): The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired scan frequency. The frequency increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It changes continuously while either button remains pressed. In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not illuminated): The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It changes continuously while either button remains pressed. (d) GAMMA select buttons and display window Selects the step gamma. The selected value is displayed in the window. The gamma value decreases when the v(up) button is pressed and increases when the w(down) button is pressed. It changes continuously while either button remains pressed.
Note The lower the value, the higher the gamma effect.

(a) ND (ND filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is illuminated, press and illuminate one of these buttons to select the corresponding ND filter. 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/8 ND 4: 1/16 ND 5: 1/64 ND When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the illumination of the ND filter select buttons indicates the selection made at the camera. (b) FILTER CTRL (filter control) button Press and illuminate the button to enable the selection of filters with the CC and ND filter select buttons of the panel. (c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons While the FILTER CTRL button is illuminated, press and illuminate one of these buttons to select the corresponding CC filter. A: Cross filter B: 3200 K (clear) C: 4300 K D: 6300 K E: 8000 K When the FILTER CTRL button is not illuminated, the illumination of the ND filter select buttons indicates the selection made at the camera. 10) White balance/black balance control block
a c

WHITE

ABSOLUTE

BLACK

(e) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window Select the appropriate video gain for the illumination of the subject to be shot. The selected gain value (dB) is displayed in the window. The gain value increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. 9) Filter control block

3
ND

5
FILTER CTRL

C
CC

(a) WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the left, the knobs are for R, G and B signal adjustment. (b) BLACK (black balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the black balance. From the left, the knobs are for R, G and B signal adjustment. (c) ABSOLUTE button Press and illuminate the button to change to the Absolute mode for manual adjustment of the R,G,B and WHITE and BLACK controls. When this button is not illuminated , Relative mode is automatically selected in the following cases. * When an automatic set-up is completed. * When a scene file is retrieved. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated, or the PARA, MASTER or SLAVE button is illuminated, Relative mode is operative and Absolute mode is inoperative. 11) Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black against a red background. When a

93

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black against a green background. When the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is illuminated red and the right half illuminated green. 12) PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate this button to permit the panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is also illuminated. 13) CALL button

Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button illuminates. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700A/700AP are illuminated if not already lit, or are turned off if they were already illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds. 14) ALARM indicator Lights when a problem occurs in the camera system. The selfdiagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU-700A/700AP.

Iris/master black control block (RCP-740)

1 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 2 IRIS RELATIVE button 3 F-number display 4 EXT indicator 12 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button

RELATIVE

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

RELATIVE
EXT
1.4 2.0

5 SENS control knob


SENS

ALARM

CLOSE

2.8 CLOSE 4.0 OPEN

6 COARES control knob


COARSE

13 MASTER BLACK indicator

CALL AUTO

5.6 8.0 11 15 22 CLO

10

MASTER BLACK

PANEL ACTIVE

IRIS

11 Master black control ring 10 IRIS control lever/preview switch 9 IRIS indicator 8 AUTO button 7 CLOSE button
1) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button is also illuminated. 2) IRIS RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press so that it is not illuminated for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 3) F-number display Displays the f-number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed. 4) EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminated when the lens extender is in use. 5) SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 6) COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment function. 7) CLOSE (iris close) button Press and illuminate the button to close the iris. 8) AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. 9) IRIS indicator The corresponding LED illuminates according to the iris setting. When the IRIS RELATIVE button is not illuminated, the upper and lower limits of the manual adjustment are displayed at a lower luminous level. 10) IRIS control lever/preview switch When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by moving this lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-2f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect
94

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


the signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table Iris adjustment function. 11) Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black value. 12) MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the master black adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for relative mode, or press and turn the illumination off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 13) MASTER BLACK indicator The corresponding LED illuminates according to the master black setting. Iris adjustment functions
Relative mode (IRIS RELATIVE button lit) IRIS lever (RCP-740) IRIS control (RCP-741) COARSE control Adjusts the relative value of the iris over 1/4 of the total Sets the range of iris settings Absolute mode (IRIS RELATIVE button not lit) Adjusts the iris over the variable range set by the Sets the lower limit for Sets the upper limit for CLOSE SENS control Does not function. according to the CLOSED value of the COARSE control. range from OPEN to CLOSED. SENS and COARSE controls. over which the iris can operate. CLOSED.

Iris/master black control block (RCP-741)

1 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 2 IRIS RELATIVE button 3 F-number display 4 EXT indicator 7 CLOSE button 8 AUTO button 5 SENS control knob 6 COARSE control knob
RELATIVE
EXT
1.4 2.0

IRIS/MB ACTIVE CLOSE AUTO SENS


CLOSE OPEN

COARSE

12 MASTER BLACK control and indicator

ALARM

2.8 4.0

CALL MASTER BLACK

5.6 8.0 11 15

13 PREVIEW button

PANEL ACTIVE PREVIEW IRIS

22 CLOSE

11 Iris gauge 10 IRIS control 9 IRIS indicator


Items 1) through 9) are the same as those shown for the RCP-740. 10) IRIS control The iris control joystick lever (RCP-740)/control knob (RCP-741) controls the lens iris setting. When the AUTO button is not illuminated, full manual control of iris is provided. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the lens iris can be trimmed over +/-2 f stops. Depressing the joystick lever (RCP-740)/preview button (RCP-741) provides the camera preview signal at the preview output. See the table Iris adjustment functions 11) Iris gauge The white line on the gauge provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the most frequently used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge rotates infinitely in either direction. When no
95

click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. 12) MASTER BLACK control and indicator Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment is always performed in Relative mode. The corresponding LED illuminates according to the master black setting. 13) PREVIEW button Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Connector Panel

1 PREVIEW connector 2 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector 3 AUX REMOTE connector 4 I/O PORT connector

PREVIEW

REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX

I/O PORT

1) PREVIEW connector (6-pin) Supplies preview signals. Power to light the PREVIEW button of the RCP-741 is provided from an external source, such as a video switcher, through this connector. 2) CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8-pin) Connects to the RCP/CNU connector of a CCU-700A/700AP or the RCP connector of a CNU-700 with a CCA-5-36XX cable. 3) AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-pin) Connects to an RCP-700/701 for remote control of iris and black level at another location. 4) I/O PORT connector (29-pin) Reserved for future use.

10

96

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(k) RCP-730/731

1 Control select block 2 STANDARD button 3 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons 4 ECS/Shutter control block 5 Filter control block 6 MONITOR SELECT buttons

LOCK PARA MASTER SLAVE

11 Power and output signal select block


AUTO SETUP

12 AUTO SETUP block


CHAR STANDARD ACTER
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE

LEVEL

START/ BREAK

WHITE

BLACK

5600K

AUTO SKIN DETAIL KNEE DETAIL GATE

SAT

BLACK CHROMA GAMMA OFF

KNEE OFF

DTL OFF

GAMMA KNEE OFF SAT

MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECTOR

ECS ON

13 MASTER GAIN buttons and display window


ECS/SHUTTER MASTER GAIN

ND SEQ
CLEAR

CC ENC
SELECT

SCENE

14 Scene file control block


STORE

MONITOR

RECALL

< W H I T E > R G B

15 Paint control block


WHITE BLACK GAMMA FLARE KNEE/ KNEE KNEE WHT CUP POINT SLOPE

DETAIL

7 Camera number/tally indication window


CLOSE

SKIN DTL-1

SKIN DTL-2

BLK GAMMA MONO COLOR /SAT COLOR CORRECTOR

AUTO

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

RELATIVE

EXT

1.4 2.0

SENS

Iris/master black control block

8 ALARM indicator
ALARM

2.8 4.0 5.6 8.0 11 15

9 CALL button 10 PANEL ACTIVE button

CALL

OSE OPEN COARSE

22

CLOSE PANEL ACTIVE

IRIS

RCP-730

7 Camera number/tally indication window


EXT

RELATIVE

RELATIVE

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

MASTER BLACK

IRIS CLOSE AUTO

SENS

PREVIEW CLOSE OPEN COARSE

Iris/master black control block

8 ALARM indicator
CALL ALARM

9 CALL button
PANEL ACTIVE IRIS

RCP-731

10 PANEL ACTIVE button

97

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) Control select block


a b c

LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE

(a) LOCK button Press and illuminate the button to disable controls except those in the iris/master black control block. Press the button again to enable the controls. (b) PARA (parallel mode) button This button is illuminated when Parallel mode is active, in which simultaneous operation with another control panel is possible. When this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel (except for the iris/master black control block) are active, even if the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and the Parallel mode is canceled. (c) MASTER and SLAVE buttons When adjusting the white balance of multiple cameras in Master/Slave mode, it is necessary to decide which is to be the master camera and which are to be slave cameras. Press and illuminate the MASTER button to specify the connected camera to be the master. Press and illuminate the SLAVE button to specify the connected camera to be a slave. The slave camera follows the master camera settings. If you press a button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off. 2) STANDARD button When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the button is pressed while illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the button was illuminated. For details, refer to the system manual. 3) Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons Various functions of the camera or the CCU-700A/700AP can be turned on and off from this panel. Functions except KNEE OFF, DTL OFF, GAMMA OFF and CHROMA OFF are ON when the respective buttons are illuminated.

monitor connected to the PIX (picture) output of the CCU-700A/700AP. SAT: Saturation function. BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function. KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function. (OFF when the button is illuminated) DTL OFF: Detail compensation function. (OFF when the button is illuminated) GAMMA OFF: Gamma function. (OFF when the button is illuminated) CHRAMA OFF: Chroma function. (OFF when the button is illuminated) KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function. MONO COLOR: Mono color function which mixes the chroma signals of the signal hue to the luminance signal. The chroma level is modulated according to the luminance signal. COLOR CORRECTOR: Color correction function for a defined hue range. CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When this button is illuminated, the results of the CCU700A/700AP self-diagnosis are displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/700AP. The results are also mixed with the video signal output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each time you press this button, the status changes as follows. OFF ON (page 1) ON (page 2) ON (page n) The contents of the self-diagnosis can be displayed when required even if this button is not illuminated. 4) ECS/Shutter control block
a

10

ECS ON

ECS/SHUTTER

b
CHAR ACTER

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL DETAIL GATE

SAT

BLACK CHROMA OFF GAMMA

KNEE OFF

DTL OFF

GAMMA OFF

KNEE SAT

MONO COLOR COLOR CORRECTOR

5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion function AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is illuminated, the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function. DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this button is illuminated, the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the

(a) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. Press again and turn off the illumination to set the camera to Shutter mode. (b) ON button Turns the ECS function on and off (when the ECS button is illuminated) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not illuminated). The selected function is ON when this button is illuminated. (c) ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons and displays window In ECS mode (when the ECS button is illuminated): The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired scan frequency. The frequency increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It
98

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


continuously changes while either button remains pressed. In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not illuminated): The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. 5) Filter control block
a b c d
Note The output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector is fixed to ENC.

ND

CC

(a) ND (ND filter select) display Indicates the number corresponding to the selected the ND filter. 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/8 ND 4: 1/16 ND 5: 1/64 ND (b) ND (ND filter select) buttons Once either button is pressed, both buttons illuminate. Each time you press the buttons, the ND filter setting changes as follows: v: 123451... w: 543215... The filter setting changes when either button remains pressed. (c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) display Indicates the number corresponding to the selected CC filter. A: Cross filter B: 3200 K (clear) C: 4300 K D: 6300 K E: 8000 K (d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons Once either button is pressed, both buttons illuminate. Each time you press the buttons, the CC filter setting changes as follows. v: ABCDEA... w: EDCBAE... The filter setting changes while either button remains pressed.
Note Once any of the (b) and (d) buttons has been pressed, all the four buttons illuminate, enabling both the ND and CC filter selections.

7) Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background illuminates in red and the right half illuminates in green. 8) ALARM indicator Illuminates when a problem occurs in the camera system and the self-diagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU700A/700AP. 9) CALL button Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button is illuminated. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700A/700AP are illuminated if not already lit, or are turned off if already illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the call button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds. 10) PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. 11) Power and output signal select block

CAM PW

TEST

BARS

(a) CAM PW (camera power) button Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the camera ON. Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the camera ON. (The button flashes until the camera is ready for transmission.) When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply is turned off. (b) Signal output select buttons Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the test signal generator of the camera and send the respective signals. TEST: To send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits. BARS: To send a color bar signal.
Note The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS button is illuminated, press the button to turn the illumination off before pressing the TEST button.

6) MONITOR SELECT buttons Press to select the output signal from the WF1 OUTPUT connector of the CCU-700A/700AP. The signal corresponding to the illuminated button is output. SEQ: (sequential): When this button is pressed, you can monitor the waveforms of the three R, G and B signals, in sequence, on a monitor connected to the WF1 OUTPUT connector. ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the SEQ circuits for the WF1 OUTPUT are turned off and the ENC signal is output from the WF1 OUTPUT connector.
99

12) AUTO SETUP block


a b c d

AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE

LEVEL

START/ BREAK

WHITE

BLACK

(a) Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be adjusted

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

automatically. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue. LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. (b) START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated during adjustment and the illumination is turned off when the adjustments are complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (c) WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (d) BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed button flashes.

15) Paint control block

a
CLEAR < W H I T E > R G B

WHITE BLACK GAMMA FLARE KNEE/ KNEE KNEE WHT CLIP POINT SLOPE

DETAIL

SKIN DTL-1

SKIN DTL-2

BLK GAMMA MONO COLOR /SAT COLOR CORRECTOR

13) MASTER GAIN buttons and display window Select the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. The selected value (dB) is displayed in the window. The gain value increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. 14) Scene file control block

a
SCENE

b
RECALL STORE

(a) CLEAR button Press and hold this button for longer than one second to clear the manually adjusted settings of the selected items and to continue with the standard settings. (b) Paint item indication window (LCD display) The selected paint items illuminated are displayed. These displayed items can be adjusted with their respective paint controls (rotary encoders). (c) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers Adjust the items selected with the paint item select button. The LED level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of the respective items. A marker to which no item is assigned is not illuminated. (d) Paint item select buttons Press and illuminate the button corresponding to the paint items to be adjusted. The selected items are displayed in the paint items indication window. WHITE (white balance adjustment): For R, G and B white level adjustments.
< W h i t e > R G B

10

(a) SCENE (scene file number) display window The file number selected with the scene file select buttons is displayed. (b) RECALL button To recall a scene file, first specify the number of the desired file with the scene file select buttons, then press this button. When the specified file is correctly recalled, the RECALL button illuminates. (c) Scene file select buttons Press the v(up) or w(down) button to select the desired scene file. When you press both the vandw buttons simultaneously, the current file number is displayed. (d) STORE button To store the current setting in a scene file, first select the desired file number with the scene file select buttons, then press this button.

BLACK (black balance adjustment): For R, G and B black level adjustments.


< B l a c k > R G B

GAMMA (gamma balance adjustment): For R, B and master gamma level adjustments.
< G a m m a > R M B

FLARE (flare balance adjustment): For R, G and B flare level adjustments.


< F l a r e > R G B

100

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


KNEE/WHT CLIP (master knee/white clip adjustments): For adjustments of the master knee point, master knee slope and white clip.
< M P o i n t K n e e > S l o p e C l i p

BLK GAMMA/SAT (black gamma/saturation adjustments): For adjustments of the saturation and black gamma.
< B L K S a t G a m m a > G a m m a

KNEE POINT (Knee point adjustments): For R, G, and B knee point adjustments.
< K n e e R G P o i n t > B

MONO COLOR (mono color adjustments): For adjustments of the saturation and hue of the chroma signal to be mixed with the mono color function.
< M o n o S a t C o l o r > H u e

KNEE SLOPE (Knee slope adjustments): For R, G, and B knee slope adjustments.
< K n e e R G S l o p e > B

DETAIL (detail adjustments): For adjustments of the detail level, detail limiter and level dependence.
< D e t a i L v l L i m i t l > L D e p

COLOR CORRECTOR (color corrector adjustments): For adjustments for the color corrector function. When you press the button once, the amounts of phase compensation (Hue) and the chroma compensation (Saturation) of the color corrector function can be adjusted.
< C o l o r H u e C o r r e c t > S a t

SKIN DTL-1 (skin detail adjustment 1): To adjust the skin detail level with the left control.
< S k i n L e v e l D e t a i l - 1 >

When you press the button twice, the center phase and the width of the range of the color corrector function can be adjusted.
< C o r r e c t P h a s e A r e a > W i d t h

Note This color corrector function is only available with the CCU-

SKIN DTL-2 (skin detail adjustment 2): For adjustments of the phase, width and saturation of skin detail.
< S k i n P h a s e D e t a i l - 2 > W i d t h S a t

700A/700AP when an optional BKP-7931(NTSC)/7311(PAL) Sub-encoder Board is installed.

Iris/master black control block (RCP-730) 4 CLOSE button 5 AUTO button 6 EXT indicator

7 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button 1 F-number display 2 RELATIVE button


RELATIVE
EXT

CLOSE

AUTO

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

8 SENS control knob


1.4 2.0 2.8 4.0

SENS

9 COARSE control knob


CLOSE OPEN COARSE

3 IRIS indicator

5.6 8.0 11 15 22

10 Master black control ring

CLOSE

IRIS

11 IRIS control lever/preview switch

101

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) F-number display Displays the f number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed. 2) RELATIVE (iris relative) button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for relative mode, or press so that the illumination is turned off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 3) IRIS indicator The corresponding LED illuminates according to the iris setting. When the RELATIVE button is not illuminated, the upper and lower limits of manual adjustment are displayed here also, but at a lower illumination level. 4) CLOSE (iris close) button Press and illuminate the button to close the iris. 5) AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. 6) EXT (lens extender) indicator Lights when the lens extender is in use. 7) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also illuminates.

8) SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 9) COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 10) Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black level. 11) IRIS control lever/preview switch When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the Iris adjustment function. Iris adjustment functions
Relative mode (IRIS RELATIVE button lit) IRIS lever (RCP-730) IRIS control (RCP-731) COARSE control Adjusts the relative value of the iris over 1/4 of the total Sets the range of iris settings Absolute mode (IRIS RELATIVE button not lit) Adjust the iris within the variable range set by the Sets the lower limit for Sets the upper limit for OPEN SENS control Does not function. according to CLOSED value set by the COARSE control.

range from OPEN to CLOSED. SENS and COARSE controls. over which the iris can operate. CLOSED.

10

Iris/master black control block (RCP-731) 1 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button 2 IRIS RELATIVE button 3 IRIS display 4 CLOSE button 5 AUTO button 6 EXT indicator
EXT

7 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button


IRIS/MB ACTIVE

RELATIVE

RELATIVE

12 MASTER BLACK display


MASTER BLACK IRIS CLOSE AUTO

8 SENS control knob


SENS

13 MASTER BLACK control 14 PREVIEW button

9 COARSE control knob


PREVIEW CLOSE OPEN COARSE

10 IRIS control 11 Iris gauge


IRIS

1) MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the master black adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and

illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press and turn the illumination off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and
102

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


this button is not operative. 2) IRIS RELATIVE button Functions the same as the RELATIVE button of the RCP-730. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for Relative mode or press so that the illumination is turned off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 3) IRIS display Displays the f number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed. The items 4) through 9) are the same as those shown for the RCP730. 10) IRIS control The iris control joystick lever (RCP-730)/control knob (RCP-731) controls the lens iris setting. When the AUTO button is not illuminated, full manual control of iris is provided. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the lens iris can be trimmed over +/-2 f stops. Depressing the joystick lever (RCP-730)/preview button (RCP-731) provides the camera preview signal at the preview output. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 11) Iris gauge The white line on the gauge provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the most frequently used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. 12) MASTER BLACK display Displays the current master black setting over the range from -99 to +99. 13) MASTER BLACK control Manually adjust the master black level. The setting is displayed in the MASTER BLACK display. 14) PREVIEW button Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector. Connector Panel Connects to an RCP-700/701. 3) PREVIEW connector (6-pin) Supplies preview signals. The RCP-731 receives the power from the external source, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW button through this connector. Adjusting the LCD Display The RCP-730/731 is provided with LCD-display adjustment mode, which permits you to adjust the brightness and contrast of the LCD display of the paint control block. 1) To enter the LCD-display adjustment mode While holding down the LOCK and PARA buttons, press the WHITE button of the paint item select buttons. The LCD display shows the following:
< D i s p l a y > B r i g h t C o n t r a s t

2) To adjust the LCD display Turn the paint controls (rotary encoders). You can adjust the brightness with the control on the left and the contrast with the control on the right. 3) To exit the LCD-display adjustment mode Press the LOCK and PARA buttons simultaneously.
Note The values set in the LCD-display adjustment mode are stored in memory when the modes are canceled. Be sure to exit this mode before turning off the power.

REMOTE CCU/CNU AUX

PREVIEW

3 PREVIEW connector 2 AUX REMOTE connector 1 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector


1) CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8-pin) Connects to the RCP/CNU connector of a CCU-700A/700AP or the RCP connector of a CNU-700 with a CCA-5-36XX cable. 2) AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-pin)
103

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(l) RCP-720/721
Operation Panel

1 STANDARD button 2 Control select block 3 Power and output signal select block

LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE

AUTO SETUP
CHAR SKIN DTL LEVEL STANDARD ACTER START

4 AUTO SETUP block 5 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons


CLEAR

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL BLACK GATE SATURATION GAMMA


SATURATION

SKIN DETAIL KNEE POINT R GAMMA KNEE SLOPE M GAMMA

KNEE SAT B GAMMA

6 Paint control block


PAINT LOCK

7 Scene file control block


SCENE FILES STORE

ECS ON

8 ECS/Shutter control block (left), Master gain control block (right)


ECS/SHUTTER MASTER GAIN

9 Filter control block


ABSOLUTE

NO

CC

LK GAMMA

WHITE

DETAIL

10 White balance/black balance control block

10
BLACK/FLARE
FLARE

11 Camera number/tally indication window


RELATIVE RELATIVE
EXT

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

MASTER BLACK

IRIS SENS

CLOSE

AUTO
CLOSE OPEN

Iris/master black control block


COARSE

CALL ALARM

RCP-720

PANEL ACTIVE IRIS

14 CALL button 13 PANEL ACTIVE button 12 ALARM indicator

RELATIVE

RELATIVE

EXT

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

MASTER BLACK

IRIS CLOSE PREVIEW


CLOSE OPEN

AUTO

SENS

Iris/master black control block


COARSE

RCP-721
IRIS

1) STANDARD button When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the button is pressed while illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the button was illuminated. For details, refer to the system manual.

2) Control select block


a b c

LOCK
PARA MASTER SLAVE

104

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(a) LOCK button Press and illuminate the button to disable controls except those in the iris/master black control block. Press the button again to enable the controls. (b) PARA (parallel mode) button This button is illuminated when the Parallel mode is active, in which simultaneous operation with another control panel is possible. When this button is illuminated, all the buttons and controls on this panel (except for the iris/master black control block) are active, even if the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the light goes out and the Parallel mode is canceled. (c) MASTER and SLAVE When adjusting the white balance of multiple cameras in Master/Slave mode, it is necessary to decide which is to be the master camera and which are to be slave cameras. Press and illuminate the MASTER button to specify the connected camera to be the master. Press and illuminate the SLAVE button to specify the connected camera to be a slave. The slave camera follows the master camera settings. If you press a button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off. 3) Power and output signal select block
a b

when the adjustments are complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (c) WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (d) BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes.

5) Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons Various functions of the camera or the CCU-700A/700AP can be turned on and off from this panel. The following switching functions are assigned to seven of the buttons at the factory, while the extreme right-hand button is reserved for future use. Press and illuminate these buttons to turn on the respective functions. Press again so that the button is not illuminated to turn off the function.

CAM PW

TEST1

BARS

(a) CAM PW (camera power) button Press and illuminate this button to turn the power supply to the camera ON. The button flashes until the camera is ready for transmission. When you press this button again, it starts flashing and the power supply is turned off. (b) Signal output select buttons Press and illuminate one of these buttons to activate the camera test signal generator and send the respective signals. TEST: To send a sawtooth signal to test the video circuits. BARS: To send a color bar signal.
Note The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If the BARS button is illuminated, press the button to turn the illumination off before pressing the TEST button.

CHAR ACTER

5600K

AUTO KNEE

SKIN DETAIL

DETAIL SATURATION BLACK GATE GAMMA

4) AUTO SETUP block


a b c d

AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL LEVEL AUTO HUE START/ BREAK

WHITE

BLACK

(a) Auto adjustment item select buttons Press and illuminate these buttons to select the items to be automatically adjusted. SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue. LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master black level, etc. (b) START/BREAK button Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated during adjustment and the illumination is turned off
105

5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature conversion function. AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is illuminated, the knee point is automatically adjusted according to the light content of the picture. SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function. DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this button is illuminated, the adjustment range of the skin tone detail is displayed in white on the monitor screen. SATURATION: Saturation function. BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function. CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When this button is illuminated, the contents of the selfdiagnosis of the CCU-700A/700AP are displayed on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER OUTPUT connector or the CCU-700A/700AP. The contents are also mixed with the video signal to be output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each time you press this button, the status changes as follows. OFF ON (page 1) ON (page 2) ON (page n) The contents of the self-diagnosis may be displayed when required even if this button is not illuminated.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(6) Paint control block


a
SKIN DETAIL KNEE POINT R GAMMA KNEE SLOPE M GAMMA SATURATION KNEE SAT B GAMMA

CLEAR

(b) STORE button To store a scene file, first press this button so that the button starts flashing, then press the SCENE FILES button with the desired number. When file registration is completed, the STORE button illumination is turned off. To cancel the registration, press the flashing button again before pressing the SCENE FILES button. The STORE button is not illuminated. (8) ECS/Shutter control block (left) Master gain control block (right)
a

PAINT LOCK

d
ECS

(a) CLEAR button Press and hold for longer than one second to clear the manually adjusted settings of the selected items and continue with the standard settings (which can be defined by the user). (b) Paint controls (rotary encoders) and LED level markers Adjust the items selected with the paint item select button. The LED level markers illuminate to indicate the adjusted value of the respective items. A marker to which no item is assigned does not illuminate. (c) Paint item select button and indicators Press the button to illuminate the green indicator corresponding to the paint items to be adjusted. The names of the selected items illuminate in yellow and can be adjusted using the respective paint controls (rotary encoders). SKIN DETAIL/SATURATION: Adjust the detail level of the skin tone with the left control and the saturation with the right control KNEE POINT/KNEE SLOPE/KNEE SAT: Adjust the knee point, knee slope and knee saturation with these three controls. R GAMMA/M GAMMA/B GAMMA: Adjust the gamma balance with these three controls
Note When the corresponding paint function is not active, the yellow indication of the item name does not illuminate and the item cannot be controlled from this panel.

ON

ECS/SHUTTER

MASTER GAIN

(d) PAINT LOCK button Press and illuminate the button to disable paint control from this panel. While this button is illuminated, only item switching with the paint item select button is enabled. 7) Scene file control block
a b

5
STORE

SCENE FILES

(a) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. Press again and turn off the illumination to set the camera to Shutter mode. (b) ON button Turns the ECS function on and off (when the ECS button is illuminated) or the shutter function (when the ECS button is not illuminated). The function is ON when this button is illuminated. (c) ECS frequency/shutter speed select buttons and display window In ECS mode (when the ECS button is illuminated): The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired scan frequency. The frequency increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not illuminated): The denominator of the selected step shutter speed is displayed in the window. Press to select the desired shutter speed. The speed increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes when either button remains pressed. (d) MASTER GAIN select buttons and display window Select the appropriate video gain according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. The selected value (dB) is displayed in the window. The gain value increases when the v(up) button is pressed and decreases when the w(down) button is pressed. It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. (9) Filter control block
a b c d

10

(a) SCENE FILES buttons While the STORE button is flashing: When you press one of these buttons, the current setting data is stored as a file with the corresponding number. When the STORE button is not illuminated: The stored data can be retrieved by pressing and illuminating the button with the desired number. Press the button to turn the illumination off and continue with the previous status.

ND

CC

ND (ND filter select) display Indicates the number corresponding to the selected ND filter. 1: Clear
106

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/8 ND 4: 1/16ND 5: 1:64 ND (b) ND (ND filter select) buttons Once either button is pressed, both buttons illuminate. Each time you press the buttons, the ND filter setting changes as follows. v: 123451... w: 543215... It continuously changes while either button remains pressed. (c) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) display Indicates the number corresponding to the selected CC filter. A: Cross filter B: 3200 K (clear) C: 4300 K D: 6300 K E: 8000 K (d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) buttons Once either button is pressed, both buttons illuminate. Each time you press the buttons, the CC filter setting changes as follows. v: ABCDEA... w: EDCBAE... It continuously changes while either button remains pressed.
Note Once you press any of the (b) and (d) buttons, all the four buttons illuminate, enabling both the ND and CC filter selections.

(10) White balance/black balance control block

a
ABSOLUTE BLK GAMMA

b
WHITE
DETAIL

Turn to adjust the black gamma. (e) DETAIL adjustment knob Turn to adjust the detail level. (f) FLARE button Toggles the black balance adjustment mode and flare balance adjustment mode for the BLACK/FLARE knobs. Press and illuminate the button to select the flare balance adjustment mode. Press the button again so that it is not illuminated to adjust the black balance. 11) Camera number/tally indication window The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in red. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black and the background of the number illuminates in green. When both the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background illuminates in red and the right half illuminates in green. 12) ALARM indicator Illuminates when a problem occurs in the camera system and the self-diagnostic function activates at the camera or the CCU700A/700AP. 13) PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates. 14) CALL button Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button is illuminated. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700A/700AP illuminate if not lit, or are turned off if they were already illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds.

c
BLACK/FLARE
FLARE

(a) ABSOLUTE button Press and illuminate the button to change to the Absolute mode for manual adjustment of the WHITE, BLACK, BLK GAMMA and DETAIL controls. When this button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected in the following cases. * When an automatic setup is completed. * When a scene file is retrieved. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is not illuminated, or the PARA, MASTER or SLAVE button is illuminated, Relative mode is always selected and this button is not operative. (b) WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the left, the knobs are for R, G, and B signal adjustment. (c) BLACK/FLARE (black balance/flare balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the black balance (when the FLARE button is not illuminated) or the flare balance (when the FLARE button is illuminated). From the left, the knobs are for R, G, and B signal adjustment. (d) BLK GAMMA (black gamma) adjustment knob
107

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Iris/master black control block (RCP-720)

1 MASTER BLACK display 2 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button 3 IRIS RELATIVE button 4 IRIS display 7 EXT indicator
RELATIVE RELATIVE
EXT

8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button


IRIS/MB ACTIVE

MASTER BLACK

IRIS SENS

9 SENS control knob

5 CLOSE button 6 AUTO button


CLOSE AUTO
CLOSE OPEN

10 COARSE control knob


COARSE

11 Master black control ring 12 IRIS control lever/preview switch

IRIS

1) MASTER BLACK display Displays the current master black setting in the range from -99 to +99. 2) MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the master black adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for Relative mode, or press and turn the illumination off for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 3) IRIS RELATIVE button When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is illuminated, the iris adjustment mode can be selected with this button. Press and illuminate the button for Relative mode or press so that it is not illuminated for Absolute mode. When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not illuminated, Relative mode is automatically selected and this button is not operative. 4) IRIS display Displays the f number of the current iris setting. When the iris is closed, CL is displayed. 5) CLOSE (iris close) button Press and illuminate the button to close the iris. 6) AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. 7) EXT (lens extender) indicator Illuminated when the lens extender is in use. 8) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button is also illuminated. 9) SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode. This control is not operative when Relative mode is selected. See the table Iris

adjustment functions. 10) COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 11) Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black level. The setting is displayed in the MASTER BLACK display. 12) IRIS control lever/preview switch When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range or +/-1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table Iris adjustment functions. Iris adjustment functions
Relative mode (IRIS RELATIVE button lit) IRIS lever (RCP-720) IRIS control (RCP-721) COARSE control Adjusts the iris with relative values within 1/4 of the total Adjust the total from the OPEN to CLOSED in relative values. Does not function. Absolute mode (IRIS RELATIVE button not lit) Adjust the iris within the variable range set by the Sets the lower limit for CLOSED. Sets the upper limit for OPEN SENS control according to the CLOSED value set by the COARSE control.

10

range from OPEN to CLOSED. SENS and COARSE controls.

108

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Iris/master black control block (RCP-721)

1 MASTER BLACK display 2 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button 3 IRIS RELATIVE button 4 IRIS display 5 CLOSE button 6 AUTO button 7 EXT indicator
RELATIVE RELATIVE
EXT

8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button


IRIS/MB ACTIVE

MASTER BLACK

IRIS CLOSE AUTO SENS

9 SENS control knob

13 MASTER BLACK control 14 PREVIEW button

PREVIEW
CLOSE OPEN

10 COARSE control knob


COARSE

11 IRIS control 12 Iris gauge


IRIS

The items 1) through 10) are the same as those shown for the RCP720. 11) IRIS control When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this control. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 12) Iris gauge The white line on the gauge provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the most frequently used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. 13) MASTER BLACK control Turn to manually adjust the master black level. The setting is displayed in the MASTER BLACK display. 14) PREVIEW button Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector.

Connector Panel

REMOTE
CCU/CNU AUX

PREVIEW

3 PREVIEW connector 2 AUX REMOTE connector 1 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector


1) CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera command network unit remote) connector (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU-700/700AP or the RCP connector of the CNU-700. 2) AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-pin) Connect to the RCP-700/701. 3) PREVIEW connector (6-pin) Supplies preview signals. The RCP-721 receives the power from an external device, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW button through this connector.

109

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(m) RCP-700/701
Operational Panel
1

PANEL ACTIVE button


2

WHITE button 3 BLACK button

RCP-700
PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK CALL

4 5

CALL button WHITE knobs

WHITE

BLACK

6
SLAVE
EXT

BLACK knobs EXT indicator IRIS/MB ACTIVE button SENS control knob

MASTER

7 8

12 AUTO button
AUTO

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

13 Camera number/

tally indication window

9
SENS

10 COARSE control knob


CLOSE OPEN

COARSE

14 Master black control ring

ALARM

11 ALARM indicator

15 IRIS control lever/preview switch


IRIS

REMOTE CONTROL PANEL

10

PANEL ACTIVE button


2

WHITE button 3 BLACK button

RCP-701
PANEL ACTIVE WHITE BLACK CALL

4 5

CALL button WHITE knobs

WHITE

BLACK

6
SLAVE
EXT

BLACK knobs EXT indicator IRIS/MB ACTIVE button SENS control knob

MASTER

7 8

12 AUTO button 13 Camera number/


AUTO

IRIS/MB ACTIVE

tally indication window


14 MASTER BLACK control
MASTER BLACK
CLOSE OPEN

9
SENS

10 COARSE control knob


COARSE ALARM

11 ALARM indicator

15 IRIS control 16 Iris gauge


IRIS PREVIEW

REMOTE CONTROL PANEL

17 PREVIEW button

Parts common to the RCP-700/701 Items 1) through 13) are common to the RCP-700 and RCP-701. 1) PANEL ACTIVE button Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to control the camera system (Panel active status). The IRIS/MB ACTIVE button

also illuminates. 2) WHITE (white balance) button Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is
110

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Note If an error occurs during adjustment, the selected button flashes.

3) BLACK (black balance) button Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and remains illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you press this button while it is illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Note If an error during adjustment, the pressed button flashes.

4) CALL button Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the CALL button is illuminated. The tally lamps on the camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700/A700AP are illuminated if they were not lit, or are turned off if they were already illuminated. When the CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds. 5) WHITE (white balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the white balance. Adjust the R and B signals, respectively. 6) BLACK (black balance manual adjustment) knobs Used to manually adjust the black balance. Adjust the R and B signals, respectively. 7) EXT (lens extender) indicator Lights when the lens extender is in use. 8) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) button Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/master black control block of the panel. When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also illuminates. 9) SENS (sensitivity) control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 10) COARSE control knob Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 11) ALARM indicator Lights when a problem occurs in the camera system and the selfdiagnostic function is activated at the camera or the CCU700A/700AP. 12) AUTO button Press and illuminate the button and the iris automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. 13) Camera number/tally indication window (incorporated with MASTER/SLAVE indications) The number of the camera being controlled from this panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black against a red background. When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black against a green background. When the red and green tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the background is illuminated red and the right half illuminated green. In Master/Slave mode, to adjust the white balance of multiple cameras the upper-left (MASTER) corner is illuminated orange when the camera being
111

controlled from this panel is designated as the master unit, and the upper-right (SLAVE) corner is illuminated orange when designated as a slave unit. RCP-700-exclusive features 14) Master black control ring Turn to manually adjust the master black. 15) IRIS control lever/preview switch When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by moving this lever. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the table Iris adjustment functions. Iris adjustment functions
IRIS lever (RCP-700) IRIS control (RCP-701) COARSE control SENS control Adjust the iris within the variable controls. Sets the lower limit for CLOSED. Sets the upper limit for OPEN according to the CLOSED value set by the COARSE control.

RCP-701-exclusive features 14)MASTER BLACK control Turn to manually adjust the master black. 15)IRIS control When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f stop with this control. See the table Iris adjustment functions. 16) Iris gauge The white line on the gauge provides a click position for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the most frequency used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click position is required, set the line outside the rotation range of the IRIS control. 17) PREVIEW button Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW connector. Connector Panel

PREVIEW

REMOTE

2 REMOTE connector PREVIEW connector

1) PREVIEW connector (6-pin) Supplies preview in. The RCP-701 receives the power from an external source, such as a video switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW button through this connector. 2) REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of a CCU-700A/700AP, the RCP connector of a CNU-700 or the AUX connector of another RCP Series Remote Control Panel.

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(n) RM-B150
Operation Panel

VTR START/STOP

1 Shutter control block


SHUTTER ECS S-EVS 1 2 3 4 5 ABCDE CC

REW STOP CAM BARS TEST

F FWD PLAY REC REVIEW

9 VTR control block 10 OUTPUT selector

2 Filter control block

ND

LOW MID HIGH

11 GAIN selector

FILTER

OUTPUT

GAIN

3 Paint control block


AUTO KNEE

KNEE

M GAMMA
A B

DETAIL
AWB PRE

4 White balance control block


R

WHITE

5 Black balance control block


R

ABB

BLACK

B IRIS/MB ACTIVE AUTO EXT

6 ACTIVE button 7 STANDARD button


ACTIVE STANDARD

10
8 Iris/master black control block
MASTER BLACK
IRIS

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B150

MENU
SELECT DISPLAY ON OFF MENU CANCEL ENTER

12 MENU operation block

1) Shutter control block


a b c

SHUTTER

ECS

S-EVS

(a) SHUTTER button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to Shutter mode. The current shutter speed is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In Shutter mode, the shutter speed is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder).

(b) ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to ECS mode. The current ECS frequency is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In ECS mode, the ECS frequency is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder). (c) S-EVS (Super EVS) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to set the camera to S-EVS mode. The current S-EVS value is shown on the display of the menu operation block for a few seconds. In S-EVS mode, the S-EVS value is adjusted with the menu select knob (rotary encoder).
Notes * When you change the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value in the

112

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


corresponding mode, the menu block display shows it for a few seconds. * When this unit is in RM Configuration Menu mode, the shutter speed, ECS frequency and S-EVS value cannot be adjusted.

2) Filter control block

a b

1 2 3 4 5 ND

ABCDE CC

c d

(c) M GAMMA (master gamma) control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the master gamma. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control. (d) DETAIL control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the detail level. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control.
Note The adjustment mode of the above three controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu. The center click position of each control is the reference position in Relative mode. The adjustment range in Relative mode is also selected using the menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu.

FILTER
(a) ND (ND filter) indicators The indicator corresponding to the currently selected ND filter illuminates. (b) ND (ND filter select) button Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this button is illuminated, the ND filter cyclically changes in the sequence of 123451... each time it is pressed. (c) CC (color temperature conversion filter) indicators The indicator that corresponds to the currently selected CC filter is illuminated. (d) CC (color temperature conversion filter select) button Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit (Filter camera control mode) to enable filter selection from this unit. When this button is illuminated, the CC filter cyclically changes in the sequence of ABCDEA... each time it is pressed.
Notes * Once you press any of the filter select buttons, both buttons illuminate. The illumination is switched off when filter selection is made on the camera. * The choice of filters that can be selected depends on the camera being used. For available filters, refer to the Operation Manual of the camera. * For a camera with four filters, you can change the function of this button to skip 5 or E and switch from 4 to1 or from D to A using the RM Configuration menu. However, when the connected camera has an automatic filter-detection facility, setting with the RM Configuration menu is not required. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu.

4) White balance control block


a b c d e

A B

AWB PRE

WHITE

3) Paint control block

AUTO KNEE

KNEE

M GAMMA

DETAIL

(a) WHITE (white balance) controls Adjusts the R/B white balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode using the RM Configuration menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. (b) A (memory A) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting stored in memory A of the camera (Memory A mode). When this button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are stored in memory A. Press the button again to release Memory A mode. (c) B (memory B) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to obtain the white balance setting stored in memory B of the camera (Memory B mode). When this button is illuminated, adjustments made to the white balance are stored in memory B. Press the button again to release Memory B mode. (d) AWB (auto white balance) button (red illumination) Press to start automatic adjustment of the selected items. The button is illuminated during adjustment and this is turned off when adjustment is complete. If you press the button while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again. (e) PRE (preset) button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to fix the white balance to 3200K (Preset mode). Press the button again to release Preset mode.
Note In Preset mode, manual adjustment with the WHITE controls and automatic adjustment with the AWB button are both disabled. When the adjustment mode of the WHITE controls is specified as Absolute mode, the Memory A, B and AWB buttons are disabled.

(a)AUTO KNEE button (amber illumination) This button is specified at the factory to turn the auto knee function on and off. Press and illuminate the button to turn the auto knee function on. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is turned on/off with this button (b) KNEE control The control is specified at the factory to adjust the master knee point. However, you can use the RM Configuration menu to change the function that is adjusted with this control.
113

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

5) Black balance control block


a b

8) Iris/master black control block


a b c
IRIS/MB ACTIVE ABB AUTO EXT

BLACK

(a) BLACK (black balance) controls These controls are specified at the factory to adjust the R/B black balance. Using the RM Configuration menu, you can change the function of these controls to adjust the R/B flare balance. The adjustment mode of these controls is specified at the factory as Relative mode, which can also be changed to Absolute mode using the menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. (b) ABB (auto black balance) button (red illumination) Press to automatically adjust the black balance and black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment and this is turned off when adjustment is completed. If you press this button when it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment is canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the button again.
Note When the adjustment mode of the BLACK controls is specified as Absolute mode, automatic black balance adjustment with the ABB button is disabled.

e f MASTER BLACK
IRIS

6) ACTIVE button (green illumination) Press to select the control mode for the connected camera system. Each time you press the button with the factory setting, the control mode cyclically switches between FULL, PART, and LOCK modes. FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled (panel active status). Both this button and the IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control block are illuminated. PART mode: Controls only from the iris/master black control block are enabled (iris/master black active status). This button is not illuminated, but the IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator stays lit. LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled (lock status). Neither this button nor the IRIS/MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control are illuminated. Using the RM Configuration menu, the function of this button can be changed to switch only between FULL and LOCK modes. The RM Configuration menu operation is possible in any mode. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. 7) STANDARD button (green illumination) When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for several seconds while the camera is initialized to its standard state. If the button is pressed while illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the button was illuminated. For details, refer to the system manual.

(a) MASTER BLACK control Manually adjusts the master black level. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Absolute mode, which can be changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. (b) EXT (lens extender) indicator (amber illumination) Lights when the lens extender is in use. (c) AUTO button (amber illumination) Press and illuminate the button to automatically adjust the iris according to the amount of input light. If you press the button when it is illuminated, this is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled. (d) IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active) indicator (green illumination) Illuminated when the control mode is set as FULL or PART mode with the ACTIVE button. When this indicator is illuminated, iris/master black controls from this unit are enabled. (e) IRIS control When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can adjust the iris manually by turning this control. When the AUTO button is illuminated, you can fine-adjust the reference value for automatic iris adjustment in a range of +/-2 f stops with this control. The adjustment mode of this control is specified at the factory as Absolute mode, which can also be changed to Relative mode using the RM Configuration menu. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. (f) Iris gauge Turn the gauge to set the white line to the most frequency used iris position, and it can be used as the reference for manual iris adjustment. 9) VTR control block Controls VTR operations.
a b c

10

VTR START/STOP
REW STOP
d

F FWD PLAY REC REVIEW


e f

w w

(a)

REW (rewind) button (amber illumination): Press this button to start a rewind operation. The button is
114

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


illuminated. F FWD (fast for ward) button (amber illumination): Press this button to start a fast-forward operation. The button is illuminated. (c) START/STOP button (red illumination): Press this button to start a recording operation. The button is illuminated. Pressing this button when it is illuminated stops the VTR recording. (d) s STOP button: Press to stop a rewind, fast-forward or playback operation. (e) PLAY button (amber illumination): Press button to start a playback operation. The button is illuminated. (f ) REC REVIEW (recording review) button (amber illumination):Press this button to execute a recording review operation. The button is illuminated. (b)
Notes * When the START/STOP button is illuminated, the other buttons in the VTR control block are deactivated. To activate the other buttons, first press the START/STOP button to cancel the Recording mode. * Some of the VTR control functions of this unit may be disabled depending on the combination of camera and VTR. For details, ask your official Sony representative.

10) OUTPUT selector Selects the output signal from the connected camera. CAM: Picture output BARS: Color bar signal TEST: Test signals for a video circuit check (the signal is selected using the RM Configuration Menu). See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. 11) GAIN (master gain) selector Selects the video gain from three values (LOW, MID, HIGH) according to the illumination of the subject to be shot. Normally, these three gain settings are those chosen in the camera set-up. Alternative gain settings may be defined by using the configuration menu of the RM-B150 Operation Panel. See Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. 12) MENU operation block
a b

When this switch is pushed in the w direction, while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at ENTER, the Detail menu is selected. The RM Configuration menu is switched off by pushing this switch in the v direction. (c) DISPLAY switch For control of the cameras menu. ON: Shows the character display function of the camera. OFF: Shows the character display function of the camera. MENU: Sets the camera into the camera menu mode. (d) CANCEL/ENTER switch To register or cancel a menu item or value selection. (e) Menu select knob (rotary encoder) In normal operation, the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value can be adjusted with this knob. In the cameras menu mode, the knob is used for camera menu operations. On the RM Configuration menu, turn the knob to select menu categories, subcategories, set items, set values and other information on the menu display. For operations on the RM Configuration menu, see Settings on the RM Configuration Menu. For operations on the cameras menu, refer to the Operation Manual of the camera or the System Manual. Note that menu mode may not be operable on some cameras. For details, ask your Sony dealer. Connector Panel

w w

1 CAMERA connector 2 MONITOR connector

CAMERA

MONITOR

MENU
SELECT DISPLAY ON OFF MENU CANCEL ENTER

(a) Menu display (8 columns) In normal operation mode, the display illuminates to show the shutter speed, ECS frequency or S-EVS value only when the shutter control block is operated. When you select the RM Configuration menu, the display shows menu items, set values, and various information depending on operations. (b) RM Configuration switch Selects the RM Configuration menu. When this switch is pushed in the w direction, the Basic menu is selected.
115

1) CAMERA connector (8-pin) Connect to the camera using the supplied remote cable. 2) MONITOR connector (BNC) Connect to a color monitor to observe the signal from the camera. Settings on the RM Configuration Menu The RM-B150 is provided with an RM Configuration Menu mode. This enables you to select and adjust the function of the buttons and

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

controls on the panel and to check various information. At the beginning of an RM Configuration menu operation, select Basic menu or Detail menu and proceed with operations as desired. Operation For menu operations, use the menu operation block of the unit (see the page to the left). To start the menu operation To select the Basic menu Push the RM Configuration switch in the wdirection. The menu display shows Cbl Comp (the first category of the Basic menu). To select the Detail menu Push the RM Configuration switch in the wdirection while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER. The menu display shows Mode Set (the first category of the Detail menu).
Note The RM Diag category of the Detail menu is used to display various information, to check operations and reset the menu. For items for which the operation procedure differs, the procedure is discussed in the corresponding Contents column. To make settings on the menu 1 Turn the menu select knob until the required category appears on the display. Example: Mode Set...VR Setup 2 Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to register your selection made in step 1. The first subcategory of the selected category appears. Example: Knee If there is no subcategory belonging to the selected category, the first setting (or display) item of that category appears on the display (proceed to step 5). 3 Turn the menu select knob until the desired subcategory appears on the display. Example: Knee...Iris 4 Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to register your selection made in step 3. (Pushing toward CANCEL reverses the operation.) The first setting item of the selected subcategory and its current setting appear. Example: Ctrl : Abs

5 Turn the menu select knob until the desired setting (or display) item appears on the display. Example: Ctrl : Abs...Min : Cls For a setting item, make your setting. 6 Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to register your setting made in step 5. 7 Turn the menu select knob until the desired category appears on the display. Example: Min : Cls...Min : 22 8 Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to register your setting made in step 7. (Pushing toward CANCEL cancels the setting in step 7.) To continue setting items, repeat steps 5 to 8. To end the menu operation Push the RM Configuration switch in the vdirection.
Notes * If an operation has not been made in Menu mode after one minute, the menu automatically exits. * Values set on the RM Configuration menu are stored in memory when you exit the menu operation. Be sure to exit the operation before turning the power off.

Basic Menu (An underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.)
Category Subcategory Cbl Comp Bright Buzzer Item Len LED Disp Lvl Out Setting Contents cable compensation circuit 10 to 99 (50) 10 to 99 (50) 0 to 99 (50) On, Off Sets the brightness of the LEDs on the control panel Sets the brightness of the menu display Sets the sound volume of the buzzer Turns buzzer output on and off 10m, 50m, 100m Sets the cable length for the

10

116

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


Detail Menu
Category Mode Set Subcategory Item Act Md2, Md3 Setting Selects the control mode. Md2: Each time the ACTIVE button is pressed, FULL and LOCK are toggled. Md3: Each time the ACTIVE button is pressed, FULL, PART and LOCK are cyclically switched. FltMax 4, 5 Sets the default numbers of the ND and CC filters. However, when the connected camera has an automatic filter detection facility, setting this item is not required. Gain SW L (RM) M (RM) H (RM) Mode [-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42 [-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42 [-3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, .....42 RM, CAM Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position LOW in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB steps to 42 dB max.) *1 Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position MID in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB steps to 42 dB max).*1 Selects the gain value for GAIN selector position HIGH in Gain Local mode (in 3 dB steps to 42 dB max.) *1 Selects the Gain Local/Remote mode. RM: Gain Local mode (The gain is controlled according to the settings on this unit regardless of the GAIN L/M/H settings on the camera.) CAM: Gain Remote mode (The gain is controlled according to the GAIN L/M/H settings on the camera. Effective only with a camera equipped with an automatic detection facility.) SW Setup AtKnee AtKnee, KneeSat BikGamma, SkinDtl Selects the function of the AUTO KNEE button. AtKnee: Turns the Auto Knee saturation function on and off (on when lit). KneeSat: Turns the Knee function on and off (on when lit). BlkGamma: Turns the Black Gamma function on and off (on SkinDtl: Turns the Skin detail function on and off (on when lit). Test 1, 2, 3 Selects the output signal when the OUTPUT selector is set to the TEST position. 1: Gamma-waveform signal 2: Three-value staircase signal 3: Ten-value staircase signal VR Setup Knee Item Knee, Slope, Knee Sat, M-VHS, M Gamma, BikGamma, Detail, SkinDtl Ctrl Scal M Gamma Item Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Knee, Slope, Knee Sat, M-VHS, M Gamma, BikGamma, Detail, SkinDtl Ctrl Scal Detail Item Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Knee, Slope, Knee Sat, M-VHS, M Gamma, BikGamma, Detail, SkinDtl Ctrl Scal White Ctrl Scal Black Item Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Black, Flare Selects the adjustment mode of the WHITE control knobs. Rel: Relative mode, Abs: Absolute mode Selects the adjustment range of the WHITE control knobs in Relative mode. The adjustment range is set as a fraction of entire variable range. Selects the function of the BLACK control knobs. Black: Black balance adjustment Flare: Flare balance adjustment Ctrl Scal Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Selects the adjustment mode of the BLACK control knobs. Rel: Relative mode, Abs: Absolute mode Selects the adjustment range of the BLACK control knobs in Relative mode. The adjustment range is set as a fraction of entire variable range. Ctrl: Selects the adjustment mode of the control knobs. Rel: Relative mode Abs: Absolute mode Scal: Selects the adjustment range of the control knobs in Relative mode. The adjustment range is set as a fraction of the entire variable range. Item: Selects the function of the control knobs. Knee: Master knee point adjustment Slope: Knee slope adjustment Knee Sat: Knee saturation adjustment M-VHS: Master V modulation shading adjustment M Gamma: Master gamma adjustment BlkGamma: Black gamma adjustment Deail: Detail adjustment SkinDtl: Skin detail adjustment (An Underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.) Contents

117

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

(An Underlined item under Setting indicates the factory setting.) Category Subcategory M Black Item Item Scal Iris Ctrl Scal Min Max Mode Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Rel, Abs 1/1, 1/2, 1/4 Cls, 22 to 1.0 Cls, 22 to 1.0 (1.4) RM, CAM Setting Contents Selects the adjustment mode of the M BLACK control knob. Rel: Relative mode, Abs: Absolute mode Selects the adjustment range of the M BLACK control knobs in Relative mode. The adjustment range is set as a fraction of the entire variable range. Selects the adjustment mode of the IRIS control. Rel: Relative mode, Abs: Absolute mode Selects the adjustment range of the IRIS control in relative mode. The adjustment range is set as a function of the entire variable range. Sets the minimum adjustment value (f) in Absolute mode. Sets the maximum adjustment value (f) in Absolute mode. Selects the variable range mode in Absolute mode. RM: The iris is adjusted within the min. and max. values set on this menu. CAM: The iris is automatically adjusted according to the iris file data of the camera. (effective only with a camera equipped with an automatic detection facility) RM Diag System COM OK, Sens, Open Shows the communication status of the command port (CAMERA connector). OK: Normal Sens: Communication is not possible. Open: No connector connected. Obj ...., CHU, CCU, CNU Shoes the connected device. ....: None CHU: Camera head CCU: Camera control unit CNU: Camera network unit DIP SW S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-4 S1-5 S1-6 S1-7 S1-8 Pnl Test On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Shows DIP switch S1-1 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-2 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-3 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-4 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-5 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-6 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-7 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Shows DIP switch S1-8 status (S1=CPU-266 board S1) Executes the panel test. To set the unit in Test mode, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER with this subcategory selected (Pnl Test displayed). In Test mode, the test of switches, LEDs and volumes can be made. To release Test mode, push the RM Configuration switch in the holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at ENTER. Version Displays the version information. To display the information, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER with this subcategory selected (Version displayed). The ROM version of this unit is displayed (The display can be scrolled with the menu select knob). To cancel the version display, push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards CANCEL. Preset ALLReset Returns (resets) all the settings made by the RM Configuration menu to the factory settings. Operating procedure:

10

direction while

1. Push the RM Configuration switch in the ENTER. All Reset flashes on the display.

direction with this subcategory

selected (All Reset displayed) while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at 2. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER .OK flashes on the display. 3. Push again the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards ENTER. 4. Reset is executed. 5. When reset is completed, Complete appears for several seconds. By pushing the CANCEL/ENTER switch towards CANCEL in step 3, the reset operation can be canceled. *1 Which value may be selected depends on the camera being used.

118

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(o) BVF-7700/7700P
Appearance

Tilt knob

PEAKING control

5 4
Red tally lamps

BRIGHT control

PEAKING switch

Tilt lock lever

PEAKING

BRIGHT

R
ON

OFF

CONTRAST

G
POWER ON

G
SCAN SIZE NORMAL

OFF

NARROW

9 8 7
Lift-lock release knob

Green tally lamps

11 10

CONTRAST control

POWER/DEGAUSS switch

SCAN SIZE switch

12

Up-tally lamp

13

Camera connector

119

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

1) Tilt knob Adjust for the desired tilt friction. 2) PEAKING control Enhances the edge sharpness of the displayed image when the PEAKING switch 3) is set to ON. The adjustable range is from 0 dB to more than 15 dB. This control has no effect on the video output signal from the camera. 3) PEAKING switch ON: The PEAKING control 2) is activated and the edge sharpness of the picture can be enhanced. OFF: The PEAKING control is deactivated. The peaking control can be turned off with a control signal sent from the camera even if the PEAKING switch is set to ON. 4) Red tally lamps Illuminate when the camera accepts a red tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. 5) BRIGHT control Adjusts the picture brightness. This control has no effect on the video output signal from the camera. 6) Tilt lock lever Pushing the lever forward toward the lens locks the viewfinder. Moving it back toward the camera operator allows the tilt friction to be adjusted with the tilt knob 1). 7) Lift-lock release knob Releases the lock on the viewfinder position. Pull the knob and the lock is released so that the viewfinder position can be raised to the middle or top position from the factory-set standard position. 8) POWER/DEGAUSS switch OFF (lower): The power supply to the viewfinder is turned off. ON (center): The power supply to the viewfinder is turned on.

DEGAUSS (upper): When an external magnetic field affects color reproduction, keep the switch at this position until the correct color is obtained. This takes about one second. 9) Green tally lamps Illuminate when the camera accepts a green tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. 10) SCAN SIZE switch NORMAL: The screen size is normal. Generally use this position. NARROW: The screen size is reduced by 80 % of the normal size. Use this position when monitoring a picture at a distance from the viewfinder when the optional outdoor hood is attached. The function of this switch is changed by a control signal from the camera or by setting the internal switch appropriately. The aspect ratio can be changed to 4:3 or 16:9 with this switch. 11) CONTRAST control Adjusts the picture contrast. This control has no effect on the video output signal from the camera. 12) Up-tally lamp Functions the same as the red tally lamps 4). To deactivate this lamp, set the UP TALLY switch on the camera to OFF. * To adjust the brightness of the up-tally lamp, refer to the operation manual provided with the camera. * To display the camera number, attach one of the supplied plates, numbered from 0 through 9. 13) Camera connector (D-sub 25-pin) Connects to the viewfinder connector on the camera.

10

Adjusting the Angle of the Viewfinder

60

30

30

40

Lift-lock release knob Middle position


You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder so that you can see the screen comfortably.

Upper position
Tilting the viewfinder The range of adjustment can be changed by altering the position of the lift-lock release knob.
120

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(p) BVF-77/77CE
Appearance

1 2 3

PEAKING control PEAKING selector Tilt knob

7 8 9

Red tally lamps BRIGHT control Tilt lock lever

PEAKING

BRIGHT

R
ON

OFF

CONTRAST

POWER ON

SCAN SIZE NORMAL

R
OFF

R
NARROW

4 5 6

Lift-lock release knob POWER switch Green tally lamps

10 11

CONTRAST control SCAN SIZE switch

12

Up-tally lamp

1) PEAKING control Used for control compensation (peaking) of the picture when the PEAKING selector is set to ON. Compensation increases as the control is turned clockwise. The compensation ranges from 0 to
121

more than 15 dB. 2) PEAKING selector Allows control compensation with the PEAKING control when this selector is set to ON. When it is set to OFF, the PEAKING control

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

does not function, and compensation is equivalent to 0 dB. 3) Tilt knob Adjusts the tilt function. 4) Lift-lock release knob Allows the viewfinder to be raised from the standard factory preset position (the lower position) to the middle or top position (the angle of the viewfinder is only adjustable at these positions). Adjust the height of the viewfinder while pulling the release knob. 5) POWER switch ON: The power of the viewfinder is turned on. (Normal position) OFF: The power of the viewfinder is turned off. 6) Green tally lamps These illuminate when the camera receives a green tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. 7) Red tally lamps These illuminate when the camera receives a red tally signal. The brightness of these lamps is adjustable with an internal control. 8) BRIGHT control Used to adjust the picture brightness. This controls has no effect on

the video output signal from the camera. 9) Tilt lock lever Pushing the lever forward toward the lens locks the viewfinder. Moving it back toward the camera operator allows the tilt friction to be adjusted with the tilt knob 3). 10) CONTRAST control Adjusts the picture contrast. 11) SCAN SIZE switch NORMAL: The screen size is normal. NARROW: The screen size is 80 % of normal. 12) Up-tally lamp Functions the same as the red tally lamps on the viewfinder screen. This lamp does not illuminate when the UP TALLY switch on the camera is set to OFF. * To adjust the brightness of this lamp, refer to the manual for the camera. * One of the supplied number plates (0 through 9) can be attached to this lamp.

Adjusting the Angle of the Viewfinder

60

10
25

25

40

The angle of the viewfinder is adjustable for comfortable viewing.


Tilt lock lever Tilt knob

122

10 Location and Function of Parts and Controls


(q) BVF-55/55CE
Appearance R TALLY lamp (red) Lights when the red tally signal is input. G TALLY lamp (green) Lights when the green tally signal is input.

Up-tally lamp (red) Set UP TALLY switch to ON. The lamp lights in the same way as the R tally lamp. The supplied number plate can be attached to this.

Tilt lock lever Fixes any tilting position.

12-pin connector Connects to a video camera's VF connector, using the supplied connecting cable. Power and video/tally signals are supplied through this connector.

Center marker V control Adjusts the vertical position of the center marker within 5% of the screen size. down V Center marker H control Adjusts the holizontal position of the center marker within 5% of the screen size. left H MARKER switch* Setting this switch to ON displays the center marker and safety zone indicatior (ON/OFF by internal switch). CONTRAST knob* Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder picture. BRIGHT knob* Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder picture. PEAKING switch and knob* Setting this switch to ON and turning the knob corrects viewfinder image. Used to adjust the focus on the video camera. *These controls do not affect the output signal of the video camera.
123

up

right

Location and Function of Parts and Controls

Tilt knob Adjusts the tilt friction.

UP TALLY switch When this switch is set to ON, the UP TALLY lamp lights in the same way as the R tally lamp.

UP TALLY DIMMER control Adjusts the brightness of the UP TALLY lamp.

Adjusting the Angle of the Viewfinder 1. Set the tilt lock lever to the friction position. 2. Adjust the friction by turning the knob.

3. Adjust the tilt. After setting the tilt position, set the tilt lock lever to the lock position.

10

Lock position Friction position Tilt lock lever

Tilt knob

40 degrees Loosen

40 degrees

124

11 Specifications
BVP-900 (with OHB-750A installed)
Input connectors MIC in Ref in DC in RET control Output Connectors Test out Prompter Video out Viewfinder connector DC out (script) Intercom AC utlity out Input/output connectors CCU Lens VTR Tracker Remote1 General Msss (Approx.) Dimensions (Approx.) Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Suuplied accessories Angle adjustment fittings Front cover Number plate Belt for cable clamp Operation manual Maintenance manual Optional accessories BVF-77, 7-inch monochrome viewfinder BVF-7700, 7-inch color viewfinder VFH-770, 7-inch viewfinder sport hood BKP-7911/7912, Script holder BKP-7910, Standalone kit OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS, Integrated imaging capsule Extension board BKP-9901, System Manual Recommended equipment CCU-700A, Camera control unit MSU-700, Master setup unit RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit x2 x1 for up tally (x1), for side panel (x2), for rear panel (x1) x2 x1 x1 20 kg (44 lb 1 oz) 442 (L) x 381 (H) x 368 (W) mm (17 1/2 x 15 x 14 1/2 inches) TBD -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) Kings type 36-pin 26-pin (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910) 10-pin 8-pin (for RCP-700 series) BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, input/output BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910) D-sub 25-pin 4-pin, 5 W/12 VDC XLR-5-pin (Female) x 2, input/output Max. 200 VA Operating tempertature Storage temperature Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenance manual 16:9/4:3 coversion board Optional accessories CA-570, Camera adaptor for CCU-700A/550 CA-550/1, Camera adaptor for CCU-700A/550 CA-553, Camera adaptor for use with BVV-5/DNV-5 CA-530, Camera adaptor for SDI output OHB-750A/750WSA/730/730WS, Integrated imaging capsule VCT-14, Tripod adaptor BVF-10/20W/C10W, Viewfinder BKP-9901, System manual x1 x1 (supplied with OHB-750WSA/730WS) XLR-3-pin (Female) x 2, phantom +48 V, Line BNC type(with an optional standalon kit, BKP-7910) XLR-4-pin (Male, with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910) 6-pin

BVP-950 (with OHB-750A installed)


Input connectors MIC in Output connectors Test out Input/Output connectors Viewfinder I/F Lens Camera adapter I/F Remote OHB I/F General Mass (Approx.) Dimensions 3.7 kg (7 lb 5 oz) with BVF-10 302 (L) x 270 (H) x 127 (W) mm (12 x 10 3/4 x 5 inches) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) 20-pin 12-pin 136-pin (68-pin x 2) 8-pin (for RCP-700 series and RM-B150) 29-pin BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms XLR-3-pin (Female), phantom +48 V

16:9/4:3 conversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSA/730WS)

125

Specifications

CA-570, Camera adaptor


Connectors MIC IN DC IN DC OUT REF IN RET OUT RETURN CONTROL EARPHONE CAMERA I/F VTR CCU (TRIAX) CCU (COAX) INCOM/PGM RCP Tracker Transmission 8.5 mm cable 14.5 mm cable General Power requirments Power consumption Mass (Approx.) Dimensions Opearting temperature Storage temperature Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenece manual Optional accessories Extension board Recommended equipment BVF-55, 5-inch B/W viewfinder VFH-550, 5-inch viewfinder sport hood AC-550, AC adaptor CCU-700A, Camera control unit MSU-700, Master setup unit RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit x1 x1 x1 DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V) 10 W (with BVF-10) 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz) 193 (L) x 212 (H) x 130 (W) mm (7 5/8 x 8 3/8 x 5 1/8 inches) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) 1000 m (Almost 0.6 mile, with CCU-700A) 2000 m (Almost 1.2 miles, with CCU-700A) XLR-3-pin (Female), balanced, phantom +48 V XLR-4-pin, (Male), 10.5 V to 17 V 4-pin, 10.5 V to 17 V, Max. 200 mA BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 6-pin Mini jack, 8 ohms 68-pin 26-pin, (CCZ type) Kings type BNC type (option) 2 ch, headset XLR-5-pin 8-pin (Female) 10-pin

11

126

11 Specifications
OHB Specifications
OHB-750A Pickup device system Device configuration Picture elements Optical spacifications Specuram system Servo control Color filter-A Color filter-B Color filter-C Color filter-D Color filter-E ND filter-1 ND filter-2 ND filter-3 ND filter-4 ND filter-5 Electrical characteristic Sensitivity Minimum subject illumination S/N rato Horizontal resolition Vertical resolution Geometric distortion Shutter speed selection Gain selection Clear scan selection Modulation depth at 5 MHz Power consumption (with BVP-950) DC input range General Operating temperature Storage temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) F 8.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 7.8 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 65 dB 900 TVL 400 TVL 450 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 30.4 ~ 7000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 65 dB 900 TVL 400 TVL 450 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 30.4 ~ 7000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 60.1 ~ 7000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC 1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 60.1 ~ 7000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 65 dB 900 TVL 400 TVL F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 65 dB 900 TVL 400 TVL F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 4:3 Standard 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 16:9/4:3 Switchable 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 4:3 Standard 1038 (H) x 504 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 16:9/4:3 Switchable 1038 (H) x 504 (V) OHB-750WSA OHB-730 OHB-730WS

Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense)

127

Specifications

CCU-700A, Camera Control Unit


Input/Output connector Camera Coax RCP/CNU AUX INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM MIC REMOTE IMTERCOM REMOTE INTERCOM (front panel) Supplied accessories AC power cord Plug holder for the AC power cord 4-pin connectors 19-pin connectors Number plate Operation manual Maintenance manual Optional accessories Triax cable BKP-7900, Extension board BKP-7931, Sub-encoder board Recommended equipment BVP-900/950, Color video camera RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel MSU-700, Master setup unit VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit CCA-5 Cables x1 x1 x1 x1 1 set x1 x1 Triax (1), Kings type BNC type (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 19-pin multi-connector (1) TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or contact selectable D-sub 15-pin (1) D-sub 25-pin (1) XLR-5-pin

CCU-550, Camera Control Unit


General Power consumption Cable length Operation temperature Dimensions Mass (Approx.) Input signals Reference RET 1/2/3 Prompter Output signals Serial 1/2 VBS 1/2/3 Y/R-Y/B-Y video R/G/B video PIX WF WF MODE MIC Output Camera input/output signals Camera Coax RCP/CNU remote INCOM/TALLY/PGM Triax, Kings type (1) BNC type (1) 8-pin multi-connector D-sub 25-pin (1) 4W/RTS TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or contact selectable MIC remote INTERCOM (front panel) Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenance manual AC power cord AC power plug holder 4-pin connectors Number plate Optional accessories Extension board BKP-5972, SDI output board BKP-5973, CCU control panel BKP-5974, DC power unit RMM-301, Rack mount adaptor x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 1 set D-sub 15-pin (1) XLR-5-pin (1) BNC type (1 each), 4:2:2 component serial digital (270 Mbps), 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 0.714 Vp-p, 75 ohms, encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 4-pin (1) XLR-3-pin, 0 dBu/-20 dBu, balanced, 2 channels BNC type (loop-through) VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type (1 each, loop-through) VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type (loop-through), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maxmum 1 A Max. 1,400 m (via 14.5 mm) -10C to +40C (+14F to +104F) 200 (W) x 124 (H) x 350 (D) mm (8 x 5 x 13 7/8 inches) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz, with BKP-5972/5973 installed)

11

128

11 Specifications
BVF-7700, 7-inch Color Viewfinder
General Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Storage humidity Dimensions Mass CRT CRT Effective size Luminance Horizontal resolution Color temperature Geometric distortion Convergence High-voltage regulation High voltage Input Input voltage Signal input Signal Color system Video signal DC playback Frequency response Peaking Sync Sync signal Line pull range Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz Vertical: more than -10 Hz Line hold range: +/-500 Hz Supplied accessories Indoor hood Number plate Fuse Screws x1 x1 x1 x2 Back poach type Back poach level: Peaking value 3 % 100 Hz to 6 MHz (+/-3 dB) 0 dB to more than 15 dB (4 MHz) Supplied accessories Indoor hood Number plate Screws Fuse x1 x1 x2 x1 NTSC,PAL (automatic,preset) Power consumption Mass Dimensions 10.5 to 17.0 VDC R/B: 0.7 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated G: 1.0 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated Blanking time Retrace time 7-inch super fine-pitch Trinitron tube 70-degree deflection, 125 (W) x 94 (H) mm 116 (W) x 87 (H) mm DC restoration more than 154 cd/m2 (45 FL) 420 lines at center, 300 lines at corner 6500K + 8MPCD Zone A: less than 1 %, Zone B: less than 2 % Zone A: less than 0.2 mm, Zone B: less than 0.3 mm less than 1.0 % 16 kV (nominal) Frequency response Apature correction Synchronization Deflection and high-voltage section 12 VDC 38 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +55C (-4F to +131F) 20 % to 90 % 20 % to 70 % 265 (W) x 188 (H) x 359 (D) mm (10 1/2 x 7 1/2 x 14 1/4 inches) 6.3 kg (13 lb 14 oz) Brightness Resolution Geometric distortion EHT regulation EHT voltage Power sources Video input Picture size

BVF-77, 7-inch B/W Viewfinder


CRT 7-inch monochrome 160(W) x 131(H) mm (6 3/8 x 5 1/4 inches) 90-degree deflection 120 (W) x 90 (H) mm (4 3/4 x 3 5/8 inches) 500 NIT 800 lines at center, 600 lines at corner Less than 1.0 % Less than +/-2 % 13.5 kV (standard) 10.5 V to 17.0 VDC 1.0 Vp-p, -6/+4 dB,sync negative, 75 ohms, terminated Back poach type Back poach level: Peaking value 2 % 10 to 90 % APL 0.1 MHz to 8 MHz (+/-3 dB) 0 dB to 15 dB (4MHz) Line pull range Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz Vertical: more than -10 Hz line hold range: more than +/-500 Hz Horizontal: less than 15 % Vertical: less than 5 % Horizontal: less than 16 % Vertical: less than 6 % 23 VA 5.0 kg (11 lb, excluding hood) 265 (W) x 178 (H) x 362 (D) mm (10 1/2 x 7 1/8 x 14 3/8 inches)

Operation and maintenance manual x1

Operation and maintenance manual x1

129

Specifications

BVF-55, 5-inch B/W Viewfinder


CRT 5-inch monochrome Screen size: 73 (H) x 97 (V) mm (2 7/8 x 3 7/8 inches) Video signal Scanning EIA standard 2:1 interlace, 525 lines 5 % underscanning Horizontal linearity error: less than 3 % Vertical linerarity error: less than 3 % Resolution Input More than 650 TV lines at center More than 550 TV lines at corner 12-pin connector Video input: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, 1 k ohms Geometric distortion Frequency response Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Operating humidity Operating altitude (Approx.) Mass (Approx.) Dimensions Supplied accessories Slide shoe V wedge shoe attachment Screws Hexagon wrench Connecting cable Studio monitor hood x1 x1 1 set x1 x1 x1 Less than 3 % -3 dB at 10 MHz 10.5 V to 17 VDC, nominal 12 VDC 10 VA -10C to +50C (+14F to +122F) 0 to 90 %, non-condensing 3,050 m (10,000 ft) 2.5 kg (4 lb 2 oz, with stand) 191 (W) x 194 (H) x 291 (D) mm (7 5/8 x 7 3/4 x 11 1/2 inches)

BVF-20W, Electric B/W CRT Viewfinder


General Power consumption Power requirements Operating temperature Storage temoerature External dimensions Mass Performance CRT Horizontal resolution Indicators Supplied accessories Microphone Operation manual Optional accessories BKW-L401, viewfinder rotation bracket Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11) Lens assembly (farsighted, -2.8D to +2.0D, Part No. A-8262-537-A) Lens assembly (low magnification, -3.6D to -0.8D, Part No. A-8262-538-A) Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations) (-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8267-737-A) Lens assembly (high-performance triple magnification) (-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8314-798-A) Coushoned eyecup: Pad (Part No. X-3678-187-A) Attachment (Part No. 3-682-494-02) x1 x1 2-inch monochrome 600 TV lines at center REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR, SAVE, ! 9.3 VDC 2.3 W -20C to +45C (-4F to + 113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to + 140F) 239 (W) x 76 (H) x 206.5 (D) mm (9 1/2 x 3 1/4 x 8 1/4 inches) 580 g (1 lb 4 oz)

BVF-10, Electric B/W Viewfinder


General Power reqirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature External Dimensions Mass Performance CRT Horizontal resolution Signal system Indicators Supplied accessories Microphone operation manual x1 x1 1.5-inch monochrome 600 TV lines at center EIA standards REC/TALLY, BATT 9.3 VDC 1.6 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm (9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches) 530 g (1 lb 3 oz)

11

130

11 Specifications
BVP-900P (with OHB-750AP installed)
Input connectors MIC in Ref in DC in RET control Output Connectors Test out Prompter Video out Viewfinder connector DC out (script) Intercom AC utlity out Input/output connectors CCU Lens VTR Tracker Remote1 General Msss (Approx.) Dimensions (Approx.) Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Supplied accessories Angle adjustment fittings Front cover Number plate Belt for cable clamp Operation manual Maintenance manual Optional accessories BVF-77CE, 7-inch monochrome viewfinder BVF-7700P, 7-inch color viewfinder VFH-770, 7-inch viewfinder sport hood BKP-7911/7912, Script holder BKP-7910P, Standalone kit OHB-750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP, Integrated imaging capsule Extension board BKP-9901, System Manual Recommended equipment CCU-700AP, Camera control unit MSU-700, Master setup unit RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit x2 x1 for up tally (x1), for side panel (x2), for rear panel (x1) x2 x1 x1 20 kg (44 lb 1 oz) 442 (L) x 381 (H) x 368 (W) mm (17 1/2 x 15 x 14 1/2 inches) TBD -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) Fischer type 36-pin 26-pin (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910P) 10-pin 8-pin (for RCP-700 series) BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, input/output BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, (with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910P) D-sub 25-pin 4-pin, 5 W/12 VDC XLR-5-pin (Female) x 2, input/output Max. 200 VA Operating tempertature Storage temperature Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenance manual 16:9/4:3 coversion board Optional accessories CA-570P, Camera adaptor for CCU-700AP/550P CA-550P/1, Camera adaptor for CCU-700AP/550P CA-553, Camera adaptor for use with BVV-5PS/DNV-5 CA-530, Camera adaptor for SDI output OHB-750AP/750WSAP/730P/730WSP, Integrated imaging capsule VCT-14, Tripod adaptor BVF-10CE/20WCE/C10W, Viewfinder BKP-9901, System manual x1 x1 (supplied with OHB-750WSAP/730WSP) XLR-3-pin (Female) x 2, phantom +48 V, Line BNC type(with an optional standalon kit, BKP-7910P) XLR-4-pin (Male, with an optional standalone kit, BKP-7910P) 6-pin

BVP-950P (with OHB-750AP installed)


Input connectors MIC in Output connectors Test out Input/Output connectors Viewfinder I/F Lens Camera adapter I/F Remote OHB I/F General Mass (Approx.) Dimensions 3.7 kg (7 lb 5 oz) with BVF-10CE 302 (L) x 270 (H) x 127 (W) mm (12 x 10 3/4 x 5 inches) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) 20-pin 12-pin 136-pin (68-pin x 2) 8-pin (for RCP-700 series and RM-B150) 29-pin BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms XLR-3-pin (Female), phantom +48 V

16:9/4:3 conversion board (supplied with OHB-750WSAP/730WSP)

131

Specifications

CA-570P, Camera adaptor


Connectors MIC IN DC IN DC OUT REF IN RET OUT RETURN CONTROL EARPHONE CAMERA I/F VTR CCU (TRIAX) CCU (COAX) INCOM/PGM RCP Tracker Transmission 8.5 mm cable 14.5 mm cable General Power requirments Power consumption Mass (Approx.) Dimensions Opearting temperature Storage temperature Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenece manual Optional accessories Extension board Recommended equipment BVF-55CE, 5-inch B/W viewfinder VFH-550, 5-inch viewfinder sport hood AC-550CE, AC adaptor CCU-700AP, Camera control unit MSU-700, Master setup unit RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit x1 x1 x1 DC 12 V (10.5 V to 17 V) 10 W (with BVF-10CE) 2.5 kg (5 lb 8 oz) 193 (L) x 212 (H) x 130 (W) mm (7 5/8 x 8 3/8 x 5 1/8 inches) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) 1000 m (Almost 0.6 mile, with CCU-700AP) 2000 m (Almost 1.2 miles, with CCU-700AP) XLR-3-pin (Female), balanced, phantom +48 V XLR-4-pin, (Male), 10.5 V to 17 V 4-pin, 10.5 V to 17 V, Max. 200 mA BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 6-pin Mini jack, 8 ohms 68-pin 26-pin, (CCZ type) Fischer type BNC type (option) 2 ch, headset XLR-5-pin 8-pin (Female) 10-pin

11

132

11 Specifications
OHB Specifications
OHB-750AP Pickup device system Device configuration Picture elements Optical spacifications Specuram system Servo control Color filter-A Color filter-B Color filter-C Color filter-D Color filter-E ND filter-1 ND filter-2 ND filter-3 ND filter-4 ND filter-5 Electrical characteristic Sensitivity Minimum subject illumination S/N rato Horizontal resolition Vertical resolution Geometric distortion Shutter speed selection Gain selection Clear scan selection Modulation depth at 5 MHz Power consumption (with BVP-950) DC input range General Operating temperature Storage temperature -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +50C (-4F to +122F) F 8.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 7.8 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 63 dB 900 TVL 480 TVL 530 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 25.4 ~ 9000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 63 dB 900 TVL 480 TVL 530 TVL (with EVS or Super EVS) 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 25.4 ~ 9000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 50.2 ~ 9000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC 1/60, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 s -3, 0, +3, +6, +9, +12, +18 dB 50.2 ~ 9000 Hz 80 % (Typical) 20 W 10.5 to 17 VDC F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 63 dB 900 TVL 480 TVL F 10.0 at 2000 lx (3200K 89.9 % reflectance) 5 lx (F1.4 +18 dB Gain up) 63 dB 900 TVL 480 TVL F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND F 1.4 prism system Yes Cross 3200K 4300K 6300K 8000K Clear 1/4 ND 1/8 ND 1/16 ND 1/64 ND 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 4:3 Standard 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch FIT CCD 16:9/4:3 Switchable 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 4:3 Standard 1038 (H) x 594 (V) 3-chip 2/3-inch IT CCD 16:9/4:3 Switchable 1038 (H) x 594 (V) OHB-750WSAP OHB-730P OHB-730WSP

Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense) Below measurable level (w/o lense)

133

Specifications

CCU-700AP, Camera Control Unit


Input/Output connector Camera Coax RCP/CNU AUX INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM MIC REMOTE IMTERCOM REMOTE INTERCOM (front panel) Supplied accessories AC power cord Plug holder for the AC power cord 4-pin connectors 19-pin connectors Number plate Operation manual Maintenance manual Optional accessories Triax cable BKP-7900, Extension board BKP-7931, Sub-encoder board Recommended equipment BVP-900P/950P, Color video camera RCP-740/741/730/731/720/721/700/701, Remote control panel MSU-700, Master setup unit VCS-700, Video selector CNU-700/500, Camera command network unit CCA-5 Cables x1 x1 x1 x1 1 set x1 x1 Triax (1), Fischer type BNC type (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 19-pin multi-connector (1) TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or contact selectable D-sub 15-pin (1) D-sub 25-pin (1) XLR-5-pin

CCU-550P, Camera Control Unit


General Power consumption Cable length Operation temperature Dimensions Mass (Approx.) Input signals Reference RET 1/2/3 Prompter Output signals Serial 1/2 VBS 1/2/3 Y/R-Y/B-Y video R/G/B video PIX WF WF MODE MIC Output Camera input/output signals Camera Coax RCP/CNU remote INCOM/TALLY/PGM Triax, Fischer type (1) BNC type (1) 8-pin multi-connector D-sub 25-pin (1) 4W/RTS TALLY: 24 VDC, TTL level or contact selectable MIC remote INTERCOM (front panel) Supplied accessories Operation manual Maintenance manual AC power cord AC power plug holder 4-pin connectors Number plate Optional accessories Extension board BKP-5972, SDI output board BKP-5973, CCU control panel BKP-5974, DC power unit RMM-301, Rack mount adaptor x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 1 set D-sub 15-pin (1) XLR-5-pin (1) BNC type (1 each), 4:2:2 component serial digital (270 Mbps), 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNCtype (1 each), VBS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 0.714 Vp-p, 75 ohms, encoded output: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 4-pin (1) XLR-3-pin, 0 dBu/-20 dBu, balanced, 2 channels BNC type (loop-through) VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type (1 each, loop-through) VBS/BS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms BNC type (loop-through), 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maxmum 1 A Max. 1,400 m (via 14.5 mm) -10C to +40C (+14F to +104F) 200 (W) x 124 (H) x 350 (D) mm (8 x 5 x 13 7/8 inches) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz, with BKP-5972/5973 installed)

11

134

11 Specifications
BVF-7700P, 7-inch Color Viewfinder
General Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Operating humidity Storage humidity Dimensions Mass CRT CRT Effective size Luminance Horizontal resolution Color temperature Geometric distortion Convergence High-voltage regulation High voltage Input Input voltage Signal input Signal Color system Video signal DC playback Frequency response Peaking Sync Sync signal Line pull range Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz Vertical: more than -10 Hz Line hold range: +/-500 Hz Supplied accessories Indoor hood Number plate Fuse Screws x1 x1 x1 x2 Back poach type Back poach level: Peaking value 3 % 100 Hz to 6 MHz (+/-3 dB) 0 dB to more than 15 dB (4 MHz) Supplied accessories Indoor hood Number plate Screws Fuse x1 x1 x2 x1 NTSC,PAL (automatic,preset) Power consumption Mass Dimensions 10.5 to 17.0 VDC R/B: 0.7 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated G: 1.0 Vp-p, with sync, 75 ohms terminated Blanking time Retrace time 7-inch super fine-pitch Trinitron tube 70-degree deflection, 125 (W) x 94 (H) mm 116 (W) x 87 (H) mm DC restoration more than 154 cd/m2 (45 FL) 420 lines at center, 300 lines at corner 6500K + 8MPCD Zone A: less than 1 %, Zone B: less than 2 % Zone A: less than 0.2 mm, Zone B: less than 0.3 mm less than 1.0 % 16 kV (nominal) Frequency response Apature correction Synchronization Deflection and high-voltage section 12 VDC 38 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +55C (-4F to +131F) 20 % to 90 % 20 % to 70 % 265 (W) x 188 (H) x 359 (D) mm (10 1/2 x 7 1/2 x 14 1/4 inches) 6.3 kg (13 lb 14 oz) Brightness Resolution Geometric distortion EHT regulation EHT voltage Power sources Video input Picture size

BVF-77CE, 7-inch B/W Viewfinder


CRT 7-inch monochrome 160(W) x 131(H) mm (6 3/8 x 5 1/4 inches) 90-degree deflection 120 (W) x 90 (H) mm (4 3/4 x 3 5/8 inches) 500 NIT 800 lines at center, 600 lines at corner Less than 1.0 % Less than +/-2 % 13.5 kV (standard) 10.5 V to 17.0 VDC 1.0 Vp-p, -6/+4 dB,sync negative, 75 ohms, terminated Back poach type Back poach level: Peaking value 2 % 10 to 90 % APL 0.1 MHz to 8 MHz (+/-3 dB) 0 dB to 15 dB (4MHz) Line pull range Horizontal: more than +/-500 Hz Vertical: more than -10 Hz line hold range: more than +/-500 Hz Horizontal: less than 15 % Vertical: less than 5 % Horizontal: less than 16 % Vertical: less than 6 % 23 VA 5.0 kg (11 lb, excluding hood) 265 (W) x 178 (H) x 362 (D) mm (10 1/2 x 7 1/8 x 14 3/8 inches)

Operation and maintenance manual x1

Operation and maintenance manual x1

135

Specifications

BVF-55CE, 5-inch B/W Viewfinder


CRT 5-inch monochrome Screen size: 73 (H) x 97 (V) mm (2 7/8 x 3 7/8 inches) Video signal Scanning CCIR standard 2:1 interlace, 525 lines 5 % underscanning Horizontal linearity error: less than 3 % Vertical linerarity error: less than 3 % Resolution Input More than 650 TV lines at center More than 550 TV lines at corner 12-pin connector Video input: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative, 1 k ohms Geometric distortion Frequency response Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Operating humidity Operating altitude (Approx.) Mass (Approx.) Dimensions Supplied accessories Slide shoe V wedge shoe attachment Screws Hexagon wrench Connecting cable Studio monitor hood x1 x1 1 set x1 x1 x1 Less than 3 % -3 dB at 10 MHz 10.5 V to 17 VDC, nominal 12 VDC 10 VA -10C to +50C (+14F to +122F) 0 to 90 %, non-condensing 3,050 m (10,000 ft) 2.5 kg (4 lb 2 oz, with stand) 191 (W) x 194 (H) x 291 (D) mm (7 5/8 x 7 3/4 x 11 1/2 inches)

BVF-20WCE, Electric B/W CRT Viewfinder


General Power consumption Power requirements Operating temperature Storage temoerature External dimensions Mass Performance CRT Horizontal resolution Indicators Supplied accessories Microphone Operation manual Optional accessories BKW-L401, viewfinder rotation bracket Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11) Lens assembly (farsighted, -2.8D to +2.0D, Part No. A-8262-537-A) Lens assembly (low magnification, -3.6D to -0.8D, Part No. A-8262-538-A) Lens assembly (standard magnification with special compensation for aberrations) (-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8267-737-A) Lens assembly (high-performance triple magnification) (-3.6D to +0.4D, Part No. A-8314-798-A) Coushoned eyecup: Pad (Part No. X-3678-187-A) Attachment (Part No. 3-682-494-02) x1 x1 2-inch monochrome 600 TV lines at center REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR, SAVE, ! 9.3 VDC 2.3 W -20C to +45C (-4F to + 113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to + 140F) 239 (W) x 76 (H) x 206.5 (D) mm (9 1/2 x 3 1/4 x 8 1/4 inches) 580 g (1 lb 4 oz)

BVF-10CE, Electric B/W Viewfinder


General Power reqirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature External Dimensions Mass Performance CRT Horizontal resolution Signal system Indicators Supplied accessories Microphone operation manual x1 x1 1.5-inch monochrome 600 TV lines at center CCIR standards REC/TALLY, BATT 9.3 VDC 1.6 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm (9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches) 530 g (1 lb 3 oz)

11

136

11 Specifications
MSU-700, Master Setup Unit
General Power requirements Current consumption Maxmum cable length Operating temperature Dimensions Mass Inputs/outputs Remote I/O port AC IN Supplied accessories AC power cord Spare fuse Operation manual Maintenance manual x1 x1 x1 x1 Plug holder for AC power cord x1 CCU/CNU: 8-pin multi-connector AUX: 8-pin multi-connector 50-pin 3-pin In United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz In other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz For USA and Canada: Max. 0.45 A For other countries: Max. 0.30 A 200 m (656 ft) 0C to +45C (+32F to +113F) 482 (W) x 222 (H) x 67 (D) mm (19 x 8 3/4 x 2 3/4 inches) 4.5 kg (9lb 15 oz) Mass Input and output connectors CCU 1 through 6 RCP 1 through 6 MSU VCS AUX 1 and 2 CHARACTER REFERENCE RS232C AC IN Suplied accessories AC power cord Plug holder for the AC power cord Operation manual Maintenance manual x1 x1 x1 x1 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output D-sub 9-pin 3-pin (1) Current consumption Operating temperature Dimensions

CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit


General Power requirements For United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Max.4.0 A 0C to +45C (+32F to +113F) 424 (W) x 132 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 5 1/4 x 15 3/4 inches) 9.5 kg (20 lb 15 oz)

VCS-700, Video selector


General Power requirements Current consumption Operating temperature Dimensions Mass Input Connectors PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT WF 1to WF 6 INPUT BNC type (6), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms BNC type (6), For USA and Canada: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms For other countries: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms PIX A INPUT WF A INPUT CHARACTER INPUT AC IN Output connectors PIX A and PIX B OUTPUT WF A and WF B OUTUT SYNC OUTPUT WF MODE Remote connectors REMOTE I/O PORT Supplied accessories AC power cord Plug holder for the AC power cord 4-pin connector Operation manual Maintenance manual x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 8-pin multi-connector (1) D-sub 37-pin (1) BNC type (1 each), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms For USA and Canada: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms For other coutries: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/ 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 ohms BNC type (1), 0.3 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms, negative polarity Round 4-pin connector (1) BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 ohms BNC type (1, with loop-through output), 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75ohms 3-pin (1) Mass Input and output connectors CCU 1 through 6 RCP 1 through 6 MSU VCS AUX 1 and 2 CHARACTER REFERENCE RS232C AC IN Suplied accessories AC power cord Plug holder for the AC power cord Operation manual Maintenance manual x1 x1 x1 x1 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1) 8-pin multi-connector (1 each) BNC type (2), video: 0.7 Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with loop-through output D-sub 9-pin 3-pin (1) In United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz In other coutries: 220 to 240VAC, 50/60 Hz For USA and Canada: Max 0.28A For other countries: Max.0.28 A 0C to +45C (+32F to +113F) 424 (W) x 44 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches) 5.2 kg (11 lb 7 oz) Current consumption Operating temperature Dimensions

CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit


General Power requirements For United States: 100 to 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz For other countries: 220 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Max.4.0 A 5C to +45C (+41F to +113F) 424 (W) x 45 (H) x 400 (D) mm (16 3/4 x 1 3/4 x 15 3/4 inches) 7 kg (15 lb 7 oz)

137

Specifications

RCP-700/701/720/721/730/731/740/741, Remote Contrl Panel


Connectors REMOTE CCU/CNU: 8-Pin PREVIEW: 8-Pin I/O port: 29-pin Power requirements Mass 30 VDC RCP-700:1.0 kg (2 lb 3 oz) RCP-701: 0.9 kg (2 lb) RCP-720: 1.8 kg (3 lb 15 oz) RCP-721: 1.7 kg (3 lb 12 oz) RCP-730: 1.8 kg (4 lb) RCP-731: 1.9 kg (4 lb 3 oz) RCP-740: 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz) RCP-741: 2.2 kg (4 lb 14 oz) Dimensions RCP-700: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 127 (D) mm (2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 5 inches) RCP-701: 68 (W) x 221 (H) x 83 (D) mm (2 3/4 x 8 3/4 x 3 3/8 inches) RCP-720: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm (4 1/8 x 14 x 5 inches) RCP-721: 102 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm (4 1/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches) RCP-730: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm (4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches) RCP-731: 102 (W) x 332 (H) x 67 (D) mm (4 1/8 x 13 1/8 x 2 3/4 inches) RCP-740: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 127 (D) mm (5 3/8 x 14 x 5 inches) RCP-741: 136 (W) x 354 (H) x 83 (D) mm (5 3/8 x 14 x 3 3/8 inches)

BVF-C10W, Electronic Color Viewfinder


General Power requirements Power consumption Operating temperature Storage temperature Dimensions Mass Performance CRT Horizontal resolution Signal system Indicators Supplied accessories Microphone Operation manual x1 x1 1.5-inch monochrome 600 TV lines at center EIA standards REC/TALLY, BATT 9.3 VDC 1.6 W -20C to +45C (-4F to +113F) -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F) 229 (W) x 76 (H) x 215 (D) mm (9 1/8 x 3 x 8 1/2 inches) 530 g (1 lb 3 oz)

11

138

Sony Corporation
MK7171V1SMC99JAN

printed in Japan SONY

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen